JP6902500B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of performing control corresponding to an advantageous period that is advantageous to the player.

In the conventional gaming machine, the number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game (game value) from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the time saving state after the jackpot game ends (advantageous period). In some cases, the total number of prize balls (game value) paid out during a small hit game (game value) can be displayed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-47205

However, in Patent Document 1,
Since the display of the aggregated values in the advantageous period is only the aggregated values in the advantageous period, it was not possible to draw the player's attention to the display of these aggregated values, and there was room for improvement in the display of the aggregated values. ..

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately displaying aggregated values in an advantageous period.

(A) A gaming machine capable of executing control corresponding to an advantageous period that is advantageous for the player.
The game value-giving means for giving game value and
A production execution means that can execute a production,
A game value totaling means capable of totalizing the game value given by the game value adding means, and
An aggregated value display means capable of displaying the aggregated value aggregated by the game value aggregation means, and
With
The advantageous period is a specific period, a period connected to the specific period, a predetermined period in which the degree of advantage for the player is different from the specific period, and a specific notification effect that is advantageous for the player is executed, and the specific period. And the predetermined period is a series of periods including a special period in which the advantage for the player is different.
The game value aggregation means
The first aggregated value, which is the aggregated value of the game value given by the game value-giving means in the advantageous period, can be aggregated, and is given by the game value-giving means during the specific period and the predetermined period. It is possible to aggregate the second aggregated value, which is the aggregated value of the game value.
The first aggregated value is aggregated until the end of the advantageous period.
Regarding the second aggregated value, when the specific period ends and the predetermined period starts, the aggregation is continued, while when the predetermined period ends and the special period starts, the aggregation ends. ,
The aggregated value display means
The first specific display corresponding to the first aggregated value and the second specific display corresponding to the second aggregated value can be displayed until each aggregation is completed.
The second specific display can be displayed during the specific period and the predetermined period, and when the predetermined period ends, the display of the second specific display ends.
further,
A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information,
With the start of power supply, the setting permission state for permitting the setting of the set value, the setting confirmation state for confirming the set setting value, and the setting control means that can be controlled by
A game control means that can be controlled to an advantageous state by a probability according to a set value, and
Movable members that can move according to the progress of the game,
At least, a movable control means capable of controlling a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position, and
It is provided with a notification means capable of notifying the setting permission state and the setting confirmation state by a common output amount.
The movable control means
When the power supply is started but the setting permission state is not controlled, the control of the return operation can be executed.
When the power supply is started and the setting permission state is controlled, the control of the return operation is not executed.
While the information including the hold information is initialized corresponding to the setting permission state, the information including the hold information is not initialized corresponding to the setting confirmation state.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine of the means A of the present invention is
It is a gaming machine that can execute control corresponding to an advantageous period that is advantageous for the player.
The game value-giving means for giving game value and
A production execution means that can execute a production,
A game value totaling means capable of totalizing the game value given by the game value adding means, and
An aggregated value display means capable of displaying the aggregated value aggregated by the game value aggregation means, and
With
The advantageous period is a specific period, a period connected to the specific period, a predetermined period in which the degree of advantage for the player is different from the specific period, and a specific notification effect that is advantageous for the player is executed, and the specific period. And a special period in which the advantage for the player is different from the predetermined period.
The game value totaling means can total the first total value which is the total value of the game value given by the game value giving means in the advantageous period, and also during the specific period and the predetermined period. It is possible to aggregate the second aggregated value, which is the aggregated value of the game value given by the game value-giving means.
The aggregated value display means can display the first aggregated value and the second aggregated value.
further,
A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information,
With the start of power supply, the setting permission state for permitting the setting of the set value, the setting confirmation state for confirming the set setting value, and the setting control means that can be controlled by
A game control means that can be controlled to an advantageous state by a probability according to a set value, and
Movable members that can move according to the progress of the game,
At least, a movable control means capable of controlling a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position, and
It is provided with a notification means capable of notifying the setting permission state and the setting confirmation state by a common output amount.
The movable control means
When the power supply is started but the setting permission state is not controlled, the control of the return operation can be executed.
When the power supply is started and the setting permission state is controlled, the control of the return operation is not executed.
While the information including the hold information is initialized corresponding to the setting permission state, the information including the hold information is not initialized corresponding to the setting confirmation state.
It is characterized by that.
Further, the gaming machine of means 1 of the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko game) that can execute control corresponding to an advantageous period (for example, a big hit game state, a low accuracy high base state, a high accuracy high base state including a special zone, and a small hit game state) that is advantageous for the player. Machine 1)
A game value-giving means for giving a game value (for example, a prize ball) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a prize ball process) and
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control process process) and
With the game value totaling means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of 113SGS308 or 113SGS319 of the prize ball number display processing shown in FIG. 8-17) that can total the game value given by the game value adding means. ,
With the total value display means capable of displaying the total value totaled by the game value totaling means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of 113SGS309 or 113SGS320 of the prize ball number display processing shown in FIG. 8-17). ,
With
The advantageous period is a specific period (for example, a jackpot gaming state) and a period connected to the specific period, and the degree of advantage for the player is different from the specific period, and a specific notification effect advantageous for the player is executed. Predetermined period (for example, high accuracy and high base state including special zone)
And a special period (for example, a low probability high base state) in which the advantage for the player is different from the specific period and the predetermined period.
The game value totaling means is the first total value which is the total value of the game value given by the game value giving means in the advantageous period (for example, the value of all the prize balls paid out during the consecutive villa). The second aggregated value (for example, paid during the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot A), which is the aggregated value of the game value given by the game value-giving means during the specific period and the predetermined period. It is possible to add up the number of prize balls issued and the number of prize balls paid out during the special zone).
The aggregated value display means can display the first aggregated value and the second aggregated value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-23, of all the prize balls paid out during the consecutive villas. The value of the first prize ball counter, which is the total value, 113SG005A, and the number of prize balls paid out during the big hit game of the probability variation big hit A, and the second prize ball, which is the total value of the number of prize balls paid out during the special zone. The part where the value of the number counter 113SG005B can be displayed on the image display device 5),
further,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the player is controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state),
A title notification means (for example, a production control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect is provided.
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 10 (D) and 10 (F)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the aggregated value in the advantageous period can be appropriately displayed. In addition, the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The game value-giving means is a second game value in which the magnitude of the game value differs between the first game value (for example, 14 prize balls when the game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening) and the first game value. (For example, 10 prize balls when the game ball wins the start winning opening and 3 prize balls when the game ball wins the starting winning opening) can be given.
The game value totaling means can total the total value of the first game value and the second game value as the first total value and the second total value (for example, the number of first prize balls). At the counter, all the number of prize balls (the prize balls paid out by winning the big prize opening, each starting prize opening, and the general winning opening) in the consecutive villas are totaled, and the probability change big hit A at the second prize ball number counter. The number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game (the prize balls paid out by winning the big prize opening, each starting winning opening, and the general winning opening) and the number of prize balls paid out during the special zone (big prize) The part that aggregates the prize balls paid out by winning the mouth, each starting prize opening, and the general winning opening))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to display a more accurate first aggregate value and second aggregate value, which are the sum of the first game value and the second game value.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 2.
The aggregated value display means can simultaneously display the first aggregated value and the second aggregated value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-23, the value 113SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the second prize. The part where the ball count counter value 113SG005B and the value 113SG005B can be displayed on the image display device 5 at the same time)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the first aggregated value and the second aggregated value can be confirmed at the same time, and the increase status of the first aggregated value and the second aggregated value can be confirmed at the same time, so that the increase status can be emphasized. ..

The gaming machine of the means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 3.
The game value aggregation means
The first total value is totaled until the end of the advantageous period (for example, the number of prize balls is totaled from the start timing of the big hit game at the time of the first hit to the end timing of 100 fluctuation displays after the end of the big hit game of the non-probability change big hit. Part to do),
Regarding the second aggregated value, the aggregation is continued when the specific period ends and the predetermined period starts, while the aggregation ends when the predetermined period ends and the special period starts. (For example, the totaling of prize balls is started from the jackpot game start timing of the probabilistic jackpot A, and if the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state of the probabilistic jackpot during the special zone, the totaling of the prize balls is continued as it is. Then, when the special zone ends (when the 32 fluctuation display after the big hit game of the probability variation big hit A ends), the part where the counting of prize balls ends),
The aggregated value display means can display the first aggregated value and the second aggregated value until the respective aggregation is completed (for example, 113SGS318 to 113SGS321 of the prize ball number display processing shown in FIG. 8-17, As shown in 113SGS327 and 113SGS328, the display of the value 113SG005A of the first prize ball counter on the image display device 5 is finished at the timing when the counting of the prize balls by the first prize ball counter is finished, and the second prize ball number is finished. The part that ends the display of the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter in the image display device 5 at the timing when the counting of the prize balls at the counter ends)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the predetermined period ends, only the second aggregated value ends and is not displayed. Therefore, the aggregated value when the specific period and the predetermined period continue without becoming a special period. It can be easily recognized by the player.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 4.
The predetermined period is more than the first predetermined period (for example, a special zone which is a high accuracy high base state from the end of the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A to the end timing of 32 fluctuation displays) and the first predetermined period. It is characterized by including a second predetermined period (for example, a non-special zone which is a high-accuracy high-base state that executes a variable display after the 33rd time after the end of the jackpot game of probability variation jackpot A), which is less advantageous for the player. It is said.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the predetermined period is the first predetermined period having a high degree of advantage, so that the hobby of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 5.
The first advantageous state corresponding to the start trigger of the predetermined period (for example, the jackpot gaming state of the probability variation jackpot A) and the second advantageous state corresponding to the start trigger of the special period (for example, the probability variation jackpot B or the non-probability variation jackpot). A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of controlling a plurality of advantageous states including a jackpot game state), and
A determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol normal process) and
With
The specific notification effect is an effect of notifying that the first advantageous state is controlled (for example, a portion in which a decorative symbol or a small symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a probability variation jackpot A).
When it is determined in the first predetermined period that the control to the first advantageous state is performed, the specific notification effect is executed, and it is determined in the first predetermined period that the control to the second advantageous state is performed. In that case, the notification that the advantageous state is controlled is not executed in the first predetermined period, and the notification is executed after the end of the first predetermined period (for example, shown in FIG. 8-22). As described above, when the fluctuation display result in the fluctuation display in the special zone is a jackpot and the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A, the small symbol is derived and displayed in the combination indicating the probability variation jackpot A in the fluctuation display for 3 seconds in the special zone. , If the variable display result in the variable display in the special zone is a big hit and the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot B or a non-probable variable jackpot, a small symbol is displayed after the special zone is finished in the variable display of the variable pattern that executes the pseudo-continuous effect. The decorative pattern is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a probability variation jackpot B or a non-probability variation jackpot).
According to this feature, if the specific notification effect is executed within the first predetermined period, the player can recognize that the control is controlled to the first advantageous state having a high degree of advantage. Therefore, within the first predetermined period. It is possible to pay attention to whether or not the specific notification effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of the means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 5 and the means 6.
The effect executing means can execute the effect in different modes in the first predetermined period and the second predetermined period (for example, in the non-special zone, the background image different from that in the special zone in the image display device 5). Is displayed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize whether it is the first predetermined period or the second predetermined period.

The gaming machine of the means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 7.
The effect executing means can execute an effect corresponding to the total value corresponding to the total value totaled by the game value totaling means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-23, the value of the first prize ball counter is The part that executes the prize ball number notification effect based on the arrival of the notification start threshold value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the total value can be easily grasped by the player, and the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 9 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 8.
Based on the entry of the game medium, a predetermined number of game media are added as the game value by the game value adding means, and the first predetermined area (for example, FIG. 8-1) is an area that does not trigger the control of the advantageous state. As shown, the general winning opening 113SG010C provided in the right game area 113SG002R and the second predetermined area provided in a route different from the first predetermined area (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-1), the left game It is provided with general winning openings 113SG010A, 113SG010B) provided in the area 113SG002L.
The effect executing means is
In the advantageous state, a promotion effect for urging the game medium to be launched toward the path provided with the first predetermined area, and a special notification effect corresponding to the game medium entering the first predetermined area. (For example, in a state where the game ball is launched toward the right game area 113SG002R (big hit game state, high accuracy high base state, first KT state, second KT state, etc.), the game ball is displayed on the image display device 5. Is displayed as a promotion image prompting the player to launch the image toward the right game area 113SG002R, and when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening 113SG010C provided in the right game area 113SG002R, the speakers 8L and 8R A part that outputs a winning sound to notify that the game ball has won the general winning opening 113SG010C),
When the game medium enters the first predetermined area in the advantageous state, the special notification effect is executed, but when the game medium enters the second predetermined area in the advantageous state, the special notification effect is executed. General provided in the left game area 113SG002L in a state where the effect is not executed (for example, a game ball is launched toward the right game area 113SG002R (big hit game state, high accuracy high base state, first KT state, second KT state, etc.)). When a game ball wins in the winning openings 113SG001A and 113SG001B, the winning sound is not notified from the speakers 8L and 8R)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort due to the entry of the game medium into the second predetermined area when the promotion effect is executed in an advantageous state.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions relating to the following means 10 to means 17. Conventionally, in some gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-101428, a title is displayed to notify the type of reach effect at the start of reach effect. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is desired to enhance the effect of the effect, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of the effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the means 10 according to another aspect is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and
A title notification means (for example, a production control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect is provided.
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 10 (D) and 10 (F)).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the means 11 is the gaming machine according to the means 10.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect, and
In the plurality of types of the suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be feasible in a common manner (for example, FIG. 10C).
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 12 is the gaming machine according to either the means 10 or the means 11.
At a plurality of execution timings during the execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) suggesting that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

The gaming machine of the means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 10 to the means 12.
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least the first suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. It is possible
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification means may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 14 is the gaming machine according to the means 13.
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 10 to the means 14.
The suggestion effect execution means may enable the suggestion effect to be executed in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 10 to the means 15.
Detection means (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player, and
A specific display execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) for performing a specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means is further provided.
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. It is possible and
During the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 18 (E) and 19 (I)).
During the valid period of detection by the detection means, the operation effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 19J and 19K).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 10 to the means 16.
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, the first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display by the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 20A). Etc.) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (second size reach title image 31AK062 or the like displayed at the time of the reach title production shown in FIG. 20 (d)) (for example, an image). A display device 5 and a CPU 120 for effect control) are further provided.
The display means
Multiple types of elements having different aspects (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 20A and 20D) composed of the above.
When either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display is displayed in the pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Display so that elements E1 to E5 are included in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 20A and 20D).
According to such a configuration, a specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which illustrates the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is explanatory drawing of the signal output from a terminal board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing of the determination example of the fluctuation pattern in a special zone. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is explanatory drawing of the output mode of all symbol confirmation signals and special symbol confirmation signals. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a part example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball number notification effect execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special zone end notification effect execution processing. It is a timing chart of the fluctuation display in the special zone. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in a big hit game and in a special zone. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in a special zone and a non-special zone. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the special zone in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the special zone in the modification 2. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like related to other feature parts. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine which concerns on other feature parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the effect control command which concerns on other feature parts. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value which becomes the random number for a game which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern which concerns on other characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which concerns on other feature parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit type determination table which concerns on other characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type which concerns on other characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table which concerns on other characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the game control data holding area which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the arrangement and display contents of the display monitor which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the storage area which stores the number of prize balls related to other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the memory map which concerns on other feature part. It is a figure which shows the built-in RAM area which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the control example of the display in the display monitor which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the buffer update which concerns on other feature parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a rear perspective view which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a rear perspective view which shows the state which opened the frame for a game machine in the modified example which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the state control example which concerns on other characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing which concerns on other feature parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the priority of the production control which concerns on other feature parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the progress setting confirmation processing in the modification which concerns on other feature parts. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the output amount changeover switch which concerns on a feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the initial setting control which concerns on the feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the notification which concerns on a feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the display example which concerns on the feature part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing which concerns on a feature part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output switching process at the start which concerns on a feature part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the in-progress output change processing which concerns on a feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the priority of the effect control in the modification which concerns on the feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the initial operation which concerns on a feature part 72AK. It is a figure which shows the control pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on which concerns on a feature part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on in the modification which concerns on the feature part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on which concerns on a feature part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the display example of the setting confirmation notification screen which concerns on a feature part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control pattern which concerns on the feature part 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing which concerns on a feature part 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of confirmation effect control processing which concerns on a feature part 74AK. It is a timing diagram which shows the control example of the confirmation effect which concerns on the feature part 74AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power-on which concerns on a feature part 75AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of confirmation effect control processing during setting change which concerns on the feature part 75AK. It is a timing diagram which shows the control example of the confirmation effect which concerns on the feature part 75AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols are displayed. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the one provided with an electric tulip type accessory.

A general winning opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of the feature portion in the present embodiment)
Next, the feature portion of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. The left side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is formed in the left game area 113SG002L where the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 is a game. It is formed in the right gaming area 113SG002R where the ball can flow down.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game are supported. In the decorative symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each of them, are variablely displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 113SG005L, 113SG005C, and 113SG005R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, one of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is started. In each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 113SG005L, 113SG005C, and 113SG005R, the decorative symbol variation (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol display areas 113SG005L, 113SG005C, 113SG005R of the image display device 5 are displayed. , The fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is the result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is used. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each is performed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “deriving”). In addition, to derive and display various display symbols such as special symbols and decorative symbols is to end the variable display by displaying the identification information such as the decorative symbols as a stop display (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display). .. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result, the variable speed of the decorative symbol becomes "0" and the decoration is displayed. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction, for example. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitively displayed, the player can recognize that the change of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

The decorative symbols displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 113SG005L, 113SG005C, and 113SG005R vary from, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese characters. It may be a number, an English character, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and a character image, and the character image may be, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, or an object other than these. , A symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). Each of the decorative symbols has a corresponding symbol number. For example, a symbol number of "1" to "8" is assigned to each of the alphanumeric characters indicating "1" to "8". The number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as "big hit" combinations and "missing" combinations can be configured (for example, seven types). 9 types, etc.).

After the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, until the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, each decorative symbol display area 113SG005L, 113SG005C, 113SG005R of "left", "middle", and "right" In, for example, a scroll display is performed in which the symbol numbers flow from the top to the bottom in order from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, the process continues. The decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 113SG005L, 113SG005C, and 113SG005R (for example, the decorative symbol display area 5L on the "left"), scroll display is performed from the one with the largest symbol number to the one with the smallest symbol number, and the symbol is displayed. When the decorative symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest number may be displayed subsequently.

A first reserved storage display area 113SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 113SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 113SG005D and the second hold storage display area 113SG005U, the hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

Here, in the hold of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. ) Generates based on the starting prize. That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Will be done. In this embodiment, the hold memory display generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first starting winning opening is displayed as a round white display, and the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening (entering). The hold memory display generated based on the start winning by entering) is similarly made into a round white display.

In the following description, the first hold storage display area 113SG005D and the second hold storage display area 113SG005U may be referred to as hold display areas, and the number of hold storages is the first hold storage display area 113SG005D and the second hold storage display. It can be recognized by the number of hold storage displays displayed in the area 113SG005U. Further, the display in which the hold storage displays are collected may be referred to as a hold display.

Whether the hold display in the first hold storage display area 113SG005D and the second hold storage display area 113SG005U is generated based on the start prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start prize opening, or the second The display mode (for example, display color and shape) may be different depending on whether the game ball is generated based on the start winning by passing (entering) the starting winning opening. In this embodiment, "execution" and "execution" are synonymous.

Further, at the left end of the image display device 5, a small symbol display area 113SG005S including small symbols of "left", "middle", and "right" that fluctuate in conjunction with the variation display of the decorative symbol is also arranged. Since the small symbol in the feature portion of the present embodiment is smaller than the decorative symbol and is displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5, it is a symbol having lower visibility and decorativeness than the decorative symbol. The present invention is not limited to this, and the small symbol may be a symbol having lower visibility and decorativeness than the decorative symbol.

The left game area 113SG002L is a game area in which a (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 113SG002R is a left game area 113SG002L by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 113SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, two general winning openings 113SG010A and 113SG010B are arranged in the left game area 113SG002L, and the passing gate 113SG041 and the variable winning ball are arranged in the right game area 113SG002R from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 113SG002R. The device 113SG006B, the general winning opening 113SG010C, and the special variable winning ball device 113SG007 are arranged in this order. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 113SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning openings 113SG010A and 113SG010B and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 113SG002R , The second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 113SG006B, the large winning opening formed by the 113SG010C and the special variable winning ball device 113SG007 can be won, and can pass through the passing gate 113SG041. That is, the game ball flowing down the right game area 113SG002R can first pass through the passing gate 113SG041, and then the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 113SG010C, and the large winning opening can be won in this order.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, the switch circuit 110 in the present embodiment includes a gate switch 21 for detecting a game ball passing through the passing gate 113SG041 and a game ball winning a prize in the first starting winning opening. The first start port switch 22A for detecting, the second start port switch 22B for detecting the game ball winning in the second start winning opening, and the second for detecting the game ball winning in the big winning opening. 1 Count switch 113SG023A, 2nd count switch 113SG023B for detecting game balls winning in general winning opening 113SG010A, 3rd count switch 113SG023C for detecting game balls winning in general winning opening 113SG010B, general winning opening 113SG010D A fourth count switch 113SG023D for detecting a winning game ball is connected.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 113SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 113SG006B, the general winning opening 113SG010C, and the special variable winning ball device 113SG007. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 113SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening, the general winning opening 113SG010C, and the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 113SG002R cannot win the first starting winning prize. It is not possible to win a prize in the mouth, the general winning opening 113SG010A and the general winning opening 113SG010B.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the player launches the game ball toward the right game area 113SG002R during the big hit game or the time saving state, the game ball flowing down the right game area 113SG002R wins the second start. It is possible to win a prize in the mouth, the general winning opening 113SG010C, and the large winning opening.

Further, a plurality of obstacle nails 113SGK2 and 113SGK3 are arranged around the normal drawing start winning opening 113SG042 in the right game area 113SG002R. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to the general winning opening 113SG010C during the big hit game can be adjusted by these obstacle nails 113SGK2 and 113SGK3.

FIG. 8-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-3 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 113SG005L, 113SG005C, and 113SG005R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit" and the variable display result are displayed. Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set in the case of "big hit".

In the variation display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variation display result designation command indicating the predetermined result that the variation display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable variable big hit" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a sixth variation display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variation display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 113SG005L, 113SG005C, and 113SG005R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is set as a third game state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (high accuracy high base state, probability variation state with time reduction) in which both time reduction control and probability variation control are performed.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variation display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening of the large winning opening, different EXT data correspond to, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "16") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state. Is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 113SG006B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C3XXH is a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball in each winning opening. The command C401H is a special zone notification command for notifying the start of the special zone described later, and the command C402H is a special zone notification command for notifying the end of the special zone described later.

FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 8-4, in the feature portion of the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the variation pattern determination are used. Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal map display result is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown) included in the RAM 102, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number values MR1 to MR1. Numerical data indicating a part of MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit game state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type to be one of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "missing normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

FIG. 8-5 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature portion of the present embodiment. In the feature portion of the present embodiment, it is a period from after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A to the execution of 32 special figure games (32 variation display) in the high accuracy high base state, and the variation display result is When the jackpot is a jackpot, the jackpot type is probabilistic. Whether or not the percentage of jackpot A is higher than in the non-special zone, and when the variable display result is "missing", the variable display of the decorative pattern Multiple fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the mode is "non-reach" and the case where the mode is "reach", and the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" or "small hit". Is prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and varies. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern in the non-special zone include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. There is. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, a plurality of normal reach α, normal reach β, ... The normal reach fluctuation pattern of is also provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

The fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment also includes a fluctuation pattern (PE1-1) of a special hit corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is a “small hit”.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the non-special zone is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation patterns of super reach α and super reach β. Has been done. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is the one. However, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the feature section of the present embodiment, as described above, in the non-special zone, the expectation of a big hit in which the variable display result becomes a "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach becomes higher. Since it is set, in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of big hit.

Next, regarding the fluctuation pattern in the special zone, when the fluctuation display result is "miss" (PA1-4) and when the fluctuation display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability change jackpot A" (PC1- The special figure fluctuation time is set to be the same in 1) (both are 3 seconds). That is, when the probability variation jackpot A occurs in the special zone (when the probability variation jackpot A is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A" in the 32 fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot), the probability variation jackpot A is every 3 seconds. When the variation display is repeatedly executed, the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating "probability variation jackpot A" in a short time (3 seconds from the start of the variation) without executing the reach effect or the like on the image display device 5. To.

Further, regarding the fluctuation patterns in the special zone, there are a plurality of fluctuation patterns (shown in FIG. 8-5) when the fluctuation display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B" or "non-probability variation jackpot". In the example, 32 fluctuation patterns from PD1-1 to PD1-32) are provided.

The fluctuation patterns PD1-N (N is an integer of 1-32) for "probability change jackpot B" and "non-probability change jackpot" in these special zones re-change the temporary stop of the decorative symbol at intervals of 3 seconds from the start of fluctuation, respectively. This is a variation pattern for deriving and displaying a decorative pattern in a combination indicating "probability variation jackpot B" or "non-probability variation jackpot" after executing the pseudo-continuous effect N times.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Therefore, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, it is determined using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided to determine these variation pattern types. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 8-6 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the feature portion of the present embodiment, the special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the first special figure and the second special figure may use individual special figure display result determination tables.

The special figure display result determination table shows the variable display result in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table to be played.

In the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-6, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-6, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in this embodiment) (about 1/30 in this embodiment). ). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability changing state (high probability state), it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability is high.

In the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-6, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" is the same regardless of whether or not the game state is in the probabilistic state. That is, in the feature portion of the present embodiment, the probability that the variation display result becomes a "big hit" is in the probability variation state (high probability state) than in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Although it is set higher in some cases, the probability that the variable display result will be a "small hit" depends on whether the game state is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability change state (high probability state). It is set to be the same as in some cases.

FIG. 8-7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature portion of the present embodiment has a plurality of jackpot types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". A table referenced to determine one of the types. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variation is displayed (variable) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). Depending on whether it is a special figure game by the symbol display device 4B), the numerical values (judgment values) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", and "probability variation jackpot". It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "B" and "non-probability variable jackpot".

Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 8-7 (B). In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, high-accuracy control and time-saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot game state. The probability variation jackpot A and the probability variation jackpot B that shift to the high accuracy high base state, and the non-probability variation jackpot that shifts to the low accuracy high base state by executing only the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state are set. ..

The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 113SG007 is repeatedly executed 16 times (so-called 16 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 113SG007 to the first state which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 113SG007 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 113SG007 to the first state which is advantageous for the player. .. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variation jackpot" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 113SG007 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 16-round (16R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probability variation jackpot. It should be noted that the probability variation control and the time saving control are not executed during the big hit game of any of the big hit types.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the present embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 113SG007 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and makes the special variable winning ball device 113SG007 extremely short. Open for a period (eg, 0.1 seconds). After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A and the probabilistic jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously. In particular, in the feature portion of the present embodiment, after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is completed, until 32 special figure games (32 variable displays) are executed, or the 32 special figure games. It may be controlled to the above-mentioned special zone until the variable display result becomes a big hit, and may be controlled to the big hit game of the probabilistic big hit A through the variable display for 3 seconds in the special zone.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before it is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), "probability variation jackpot A" and "probability variation jackpot B" are used depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. , "Non-probability variable jackpot" is assigned different judgment values for the jackpot type. That is, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") is the "probability change jackpot B" in which the number of rounds is smaller than that of the "probability change jackpot A". When the variable special figure is the second special figure, a smaller number of judgment values than when the variable special figure is the first special figure is the big hit of "probability variable big hit B". It is assigned to the type. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, the jackpot type is set to "probability variable jackpot B", and the ratio of controlling to the normal open jackpot state where the number of rounds is smaller than that of "probability variable jackpot A" is small, so that it can be obtained. It is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of big hit games with few prize balls and prevent the game from being deteriorated.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is determined by whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot B" differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and the "probability change jackpot A" is used. The assignment of the judgment value to "" also differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and for "probability variable jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, the variable special figure is the second special figure. It is set so that the case of is easier to determine than the case of the first special figure.

When the variable special figure is the second special figure, the determination value may not be assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". By doing so, when the variable special map is the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probability variable jackpot B", which has a smaller number of lands than "probable variable jackpot A". It is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit game of "probability change big hit B", which is obtained less prize balls than the big hit game of "probability change big hit A", and to prevent the game interest from being deteriorated.

Further, in the feature portion of the present embodiment, a mode in which the jackpot type is determined by referring to different table data depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is determined by referring to the table data common to the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure and the case where the variable special figure is the second special figure. You may do it.

The RAM 102 in the present embodiment is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are reserved data. , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit is a special feature in which the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 113SG006B and a starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, but it has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are reserved data. , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

Although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 113SG041 is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal figure hold storage unit has the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure start. Although the game ball that has won the winning opening 113SG042 is detected by the normal drawing start port switch 113SG024, the holding information of the normal drawing game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 is stored. For example, the Fuzu hold storage unit associates with the hold number in the order in which the game ball passes through (wins) the passing gate 113SG041 and the Fuzu start winning opening 113SG042, and the CPU 103 determines the random number circuit 104 or the like based on the passing of the game ball. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal map display result extracted from the data is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided on the main substrate 11 in the feature portion of the present embodiment via the terminal substrate 113SG016 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. An information output circuit 113SG112 for outputting various signals to a management device such as a management computer of the pachinko game hall and a data lamp provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko game machine 1 is also mounted.

The terminal board 113SG016 is provided with a plurality of terminals for outputting signals, and different signals are output from each terminal. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the prize ball signal from the terminal 1, the door opening signal from the terminal 2, the all symbol confirmation signal from the terminal 3, the all start winning opening signal from the terminal 4, and the terminal. A jackpot 1 signal is output from 5, a jackpot 2 signal is output from terminal 6, a jackpot 3 signal is output from terminal 7, a special symbol confirmation signal is output from terminal 8, a prize signal is output from terminal 9, and a security signal is output from terminal 10. It has become like.

Among these signals, the prize ball signal is a signal that is output for 0.1 seconds every time 10 prize balls are paid out, and the door opening signal is output during the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 (game). It is a signal (output from the timing when the machine frame 3 is opened to the timing when it is closed), and all the symbol confirmation signals are for 0.5 seconds (0.8 seconds in the high base state) every time the special symbol is stopped. The all-start winning opening signal is a signal that is output for 0.1 seconds each time a game ball is won in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Yes, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal output during the jackpot game (output from the start timing to the end timing of the jackpot game), and the jackpot 2 signal is output during the jackpot middle and high base states (first hit). It is a signal that is output from the start timing of the jackpot game to the timing when the 100 fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot game of the non-probability change jackpot ends, and the jackpot 3 signal is output during the high base state (the jackpot of the probability variation jackpot). It is a signal (output from the end timing of the game to the start of the next big hit game, and from the end timing of the big hit game of the non-probability change big hit to the timing when the 100-time variation display ends).

In the feature portion of the present embodiment, a mode in which different signals can be output from each terminal on the terminal board 113SG016 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is specified in the terminal board 113SG016. A plurality of signals (for example, all symbol confirmation signals and special symbol confirmation signals) may be output from the terminal of.

Furthermore, the special symbol confirmation signal is when the variation display result after the end of the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A until the end of the 32 fluctuation display is lost (that is, when the variation display result is lost during the special zone). It is a signal that is output for 0.5 seconds (0.8 seconds in the case of high base state) every time the special symbol is stopped, and the winning signal is the prize according to the winning of the game ball to all the winning openings. It is a signal output for 0.1 seconds for every 10 balls.

In addition, the security signal is 30 seconds from the timing when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, 240 seconds from the time when the abnormal prize is detected, from the time when the magnetic abnormality is detected to the power failure, and after the power failure. It is a signal that is output for 240 seconds from the timing when the power is turned on to 1 and for 240 seconds from the timing when the switch abnormality is detected.

The all symbol confirmation signal and the special symbol confirmation signal in the feature portion of the present embodiment are both signals for notifying the external device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the special symbol has stopped. The external device to be notified is different between the symbol confirmation signal and the special symbol confirmation signal. Specifically, the all symbol confirmation signal is a signal output to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall provided with the pachinko game machine 1, and the special symbol confirmation signal is the pachinko game machine 1. It is a signal output to a data lamp provided in a one-to-one correspondence.

In the present embodiment, the prize ball signal, the door opening signal, the all symbol confirmation signal, the all start winning opening signal, the big hit 1 signal, the big hit 2 signal, the big hit 3 signal, the special symbol confirmation signal, and the winning signal are transmitted from the terminal board 113SG016. , However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the terminal board 113SG016 is, for example, by entering (winning) each winning opening or out opening. The out signal may be output for 0.1 seconds every time the number of game balls discharged from the pachinko game machine 1 reaches 10.

Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-9 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control timer interrupt processing in the feature portion of the present embodiment. In the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process (113SGS22a) for paying out the prize ball after executing the switch process (S21) and the main side error process (S22). In the prize ball processing, the CPU 103 of the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 113SG023A, the second count switch 113SG023B, the third count switch 113SG023C, and the fourth count switch 113SG023D in the switch processing. Of these, the prize balls are paid out according to the switch that received the detection signal, and the transmission setting of the prize ball number notification command according to the number of paid out prize balls is set. After that, the above-mentioned information output process (S23), game random number update process (S24), special symbol process process (S25), normal symbol process process (S26), and command control process (S27) may be executed.

FIG. 8-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first refers to the value set in the special zone counter described later, and determines whether or not the user is in the special zone (113SGS161). If it is not in the special zone (113SGS161; N), it proceeds to 13SGS168, and if it is in the special zone (113SGS161: Y), it is further determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (113SGS162). If the jackpot flag is not set (113SGS162; N), the process proceeds to 113SGS166, and if the jackpot flag is set (113SGS162; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot A. (113SGS163).

When the jackpot type of the jackpot is the probability variation jackpot A (113SGS163; Y), the fluctuation pattern determination table for the probability variation jackpot A in the special zone is selected and the process proceeds to 113SGS180 (113SGS164), and the jackpot type of the jackpot is the probability variation jackpot B. Alternatively, in the case of a non-probability change jackpot (113SGS163; N), the special zone medium probability variation jackpot B / non-probability variation jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the value of the special zone counter is selected and the process proceeds to 113SGS180 (113SGS165).

Further, when the big hit flag is not set in 113SGS162 (113SGS162; N), it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (113SGS166). If the small hit flag is not set (113SGS166; N), the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss in the special zone is selected and the process proceeds to 113SGS180 (113SGS167). If the small hit flag is set, the process proceeds to 113SGS171. ..

On the other hand, when the 113SGS161 is not in the special zone, that is, when "0" is set in the special zone counter (113SGS161; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (113SGS168). When the jackpot flag is set (113SGS168; Y), the variation pattern determination table for medium jackpot in the non-special zone is selected and the process proceeds to 113SGS180 (113SGS169). When the jackpot flag is not set (113SGS168; N), , It is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (113SGS170). If the small hit flag is set (113SGS170; Y), the process proceeds to 113SGS171. Then, in 113SGS171, the variation pattern determination table for small hits is selected and the process proceeds to 113SGS180.

Further, when the small hit flag is not set in 113SGS170 (113SGS170; N), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set (113SGS172). When the time saving flag is set (113SGS172; Y), the loss variation pattern determination table D described later is selected and the process proceeds to 113SGS180 (113SGS173). When the time saving flag is not set (113SGS172; N), the time saving flag is not set. It is determined whether or not the total number of pending storages is 2 or more (113SGS174). When the total number of pending storages is 1 or less (113SGS174; N), the loss variation pattern determination table A described later is selected and the process proceeds to 113SGS180 (113SGS175), and when the total number of reserved storages is 2 or more (113SGS174; N). 113SGS174; Y) further determines whether or not the total number of pending storages is abnormal by 5 (113SGS176).

When the total number of reserved storages is 4 or less (113SGS176; N), the loss variation pattern determination table B described later is selected and the process proceeds to 113SGS180 (113SGS177), and the total number of reserved storages is 5 or more (113SGS176; N). 113SGS176; Y) selects the loss pattern determination table C, which will be described later, and proceeds to 113SGS180.

Then, in the 113SGS180, for example, by referring to the selected variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination stored in the variation random number buffer or the like, a plurality of types of variation patterns can be obtained. It is decided to be either (S170).

In the loss pattern determination table A, the non-reach loss variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach loss variation pattern in the non-special zone (PA2-1), and the super in the non-special zone. A predetermined disturbance within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss in the non-special zone (PA2-3). A numerical value is assigned as a judgment value. Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (PA1-2) corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4 and the variation pattern of normal reach loss in the non-special zone (PA2). -1), fluctuation pattern for super reach α loss in the non-special zone (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern for super reach β loss in the non-special zone (PA2-3) A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the numerical value MR3 can take. Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (PA1-3) corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 5 to 8 and the variation pattern of normal reach loss in the non-special zone (PA2). -1), fluctuation pattern for super reach α loss in the non-special zone (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern for super reach β loss in the non-special zone (PA2-3) A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the numerical value MR3 can take. Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4) corresponding to the time reduction control (during the high base including the special zone), and the variation of the normal reach loss in the non-special zone. Fluctuation pattern determination for pattern (PA2-1), fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss in non-special zone (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss in non-special zone (PA2-3) A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the MR3 can take.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, the fluctuation time of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and further, the fluctuation pattern (PA1). The fluctuation time of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of -2). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. Occasionally, by winning a start, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time becomes long.

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for medium jackpot in the non-special zone, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot in the non-special zone (PB1-1) and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot in the non-special zone (PB1-2). , A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot in the non-special zone.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, all random numbers within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take are assigned as determination values to the variation pattern PE1-1 for special hits (small hits). Has been done.

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for the jackpot A in the special zone, all the disturbances in the range that the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination can take for the fluctuation pattern (PC1-1) of the jackpot in the special zone. A numerical value is assigned as a judgment value. Further, in the variation pattern determination table for loss in the special zone, the variation pattern determination disorder for the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4) corresponding to the time reduction control (in the high base including the special zone). All random values in the range that the numerical value MR3 can take are assigned as determination values.

Then, in the variation pattern determination table for the probability variation jackpot B / non-probability variation jackpot in each special zone, as shown in FIG. 8-11, a plurality of variation patterns (PD1-1 to PD1-32) for executing the pseudo-continuous effect Of these, all random numbers within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take are assigned as determination values to one variation pattern corresponding to the number of fluctuations (value of the special zone counter) in the special zone. There is.

That is, when the value of the special zone counter is "32" (the first fluctuation in the special zone), the pseudo-continuous effect is executed 32 times in the fluctuation pattern determination table for the probability variation jackpot B / non-probability variation jackpot in the special zone. When all random numbers in the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take are assigned as judgment values to the fluctuation pattern (PD1-32) of the jackpot, and the value of the special zone counter is "31". (Second fluctuation in the special zone) In the special zone medium probability change jackpot B / non-probability change jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern (PD1-31) of the jackpot that executes the pseudo-continuous production 31 times is changed. Random value for pattern judgment All random values in the range that MR3 can take are assigned as judgment values, and when the value of the special zone counter is "30" (the third fluctuation in the special zone), the special zone In the fluctuation pattern judgment table for medium probability variation jackpot B and non-probability variation jackpot, the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is within the range that can be taken for the fluctuation pattern (PD1-30) of the jackpot that executes the pseudo-continuous effect 30 times. All random numbers are assigned as judgment values ... When the value of the special zone counter is "1" (the 32nd fluctuation in the special zone), the fluctuation pattern for the probability variation jackpot B / non-probability variation jackpot in the special zone In the determination table, all random numbers in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take are assigned as the determination values to the variation pattern (PD1-1) of the jackpot that executes the pseudo-continuous effect once. There is.

Therefore, in the first variation display in the special zone, when the variation display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit B or a non-probable change big hit, the image display device 5 executes a pseudo-continuous effect 32 times. Later, when the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating the probability variation jackpot B or the non-probability variation jackpot, and the variation display result is the jackpot and the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot B or the non-probability variation jackpot in the second variation display in the special zone. After 31 pseudo-continuous effects are executed on the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating the probability variation jackpot B and the non-probability variation jackpot, and the variation display result is the jackpot in the third variation display in the special zone. In addition, when the jackpot type is probabilistic jackpot B or non-probable variable jackpot, the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating probabilistic jackpot B or non-probable variable jackpot after 30 pseudo-continuous effects are executed on the image display device 5. ... When the variation display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot B or a non-probability variation jackpot in the 32nd variation display in the special zone, one pseudo continuous effect is executed on the image display device 5. Later, the decorative design is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a probability variation jackpot B or a non-probability variation jackpot.

As described above, in the feature portion of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern is determined in the fluctuation display in the low probability and low base state of the game state, the fluctuation pattern determination table for medium and large hits in the non-special zone, for small hits The variation pattern is determined by selecting any of the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern determination table B for loss, and the variation pattern determination table C for loss.

Further, in the high probability high base state after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is completed, when the fluctuation pattern is determined in the fluctuation display (in the special zone) of the first to 32nd times after the jackpot game is completed, the probability variation jackpot in the special zone is determined. Select the fluctuation pattern judgment table for A, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for small hits, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for small hits, and the fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss in the special zone according to the value of the special zone counter. When the fluctuation pattern is determined and the fluctuation pattern is determined in the fluctuation display (in the non-special zone) after the 33rd time after the end of the big hit game, the fluctuation pattern determination table for the medium-big hit in the non-special zone and the fluctuation pattern for the small hit The fluctuation pattern is determined by selecting either the determination table or the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss.

In addition, when determining the fluctuation pattern in the high accuracy high base state after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot B or the low accuracy high base state after the jackpot game of the non-probability jackpot B, the fluctuation pattern determination table for medium jackpot in the non-special zone , The variation pattern determination table for small hits and the variation pattern determination table D for loss are selected to determine the variation pattern.

That is, in the high base state in the feature unit 4 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table that can be selected to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the jackpot type of the jackpot game that triggered the high base state is displayed. May be different.

In the first to 32nd fluctuation display (during the special zone) after the end of the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A in the feature portion 4 of the present embodiment, the value of the special zone counter is set as shown in the processing of 113SGS164. An example of a mode in which the fluctuation pattern determination table is switched according to the situation is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a counter for counting the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game is provided instead of the special zone counter, and the probability change In the processing of 113SGS164 after the jackpot game of jackpot A is completed, the fluctuation pattern determination table may be switched according to the value of the counter.

In the feature section of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit B or a non-probable change big hit in the fluctuation display in the special zone, the fluctuation display in the special zone is displayed. Although the embodiment in which the pseudo-continuous production of different times according to the number of times is executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display is performed in the variable display within a predetermined predetermined range in the special zone. When the result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit B or a non-probable variable big hit, a specific number of pseudo-continuous effects are always executed in the variable display (for example, the variable display result in the first variable display in the special zone). If is a big hit and the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit B or a non-probable variable big hit, 32 pseudo-continuous effects are executed in the variable display, and the variable display result is a big hit in the 2nd to 11th variable display in the special zone. In addition, when the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot B or a non-probability variable jackpot, 31 pseudo-continuous effects are executed, and the variable display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot in the 12th to 21st fluctuation display in the special zone. In the case of B or a non-probability change jackpot, 20 times of pseudo-continuous production may be executed), and the data capacity for pseudo-continuous production stored in the RAM 122 may be suppressed.

After returning to FIG. 8-10 and determining the fluctuation pattern by 113SGS180, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special figure game according to the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value. A setting is made to start the variation of the special symbol so as to start any of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 4B (113SGS181). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of 113SGS181, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol are made (113SGS182). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a fluctuation display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the first hold storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is sent to the game control buffer setting unit. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the provided send command buffer. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a fluctuation display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the second hold storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Store in the command buffer area.

After executing the process of 113SGS182, the special symbol fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (113SGS183). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variation display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variation display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. Is. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (113SGS184), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

FIG. 8-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S113 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing of S113 to end the variation of the special symbol, and stops at the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to derive and display a symbol (113SGS201). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (113SGS202). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (113SGS203), and if the jackpot flag is not set (113SGS203; N), the process proceeds to 113SGS211.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is set (113SGS203; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag (113SGS204) if the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set, and the effect control board 12 is set. , To send one of the hit start 1 designation command (probability variation jackpot A), hit start 2 designation command (probability variation jackpot B), and hit start 3 designation command (non-probability variation jackpot) according to the stored jackpot type. Is set (113SGS205).

Further, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (113SGS206).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (113SGS207). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 16 times in the case of the probability variation jackpot A and 5 times in the case of the probability variation jackpot B or the non-probability variation jackpot) is set in the large winning opening opening counter (113SGS208). Then, after setting for outputting all symbol confirmation signals and special symbol confirmation signals from the terminal board 113SG016 via the information output circuit 113SG112 (113SGS209), the value of the special symbol process flag is preprocessed to open the jackpot (S114). It is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to, and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (113SGS210).

On the other hand, in 113SGS211 the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". When the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (113SGS211; Y), the process proceeds to 113SGS216.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (113SGS211; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is set to -1 (113SGS212). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (113SGS213), and if it is not "0" (113SGS213; N), the process proceeds to 113SGS216, and the value of the time reduction counter is "0". In the case of (113SGS213; Y), after clearing the time saving flag (113SGS214) in order to end the time saving control, a gaming state (specifically, low probability) corresponding to the setting state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag is set. After setting the transmission of the game state specification command corresponding to (low base) (113SGS215), the process proceeds to 113SGS216.

In 113SGS216, it is determined whether or not the value of the special zone counter is "0". When the value of the special zone counter is any of 1 to 32 (113SGS216; N), the value of the special zone counter is set to -1 (113SGS217). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special zone counter after subtraction is "0" (113SGS218), and when the value of the special zone counter after subtraction is "0" (113SGS218; Y), the special zone After setting the transmission of the end notification command, the process proceeds to 113SGS220 (113SGS219). If the value of the special zone counter after subtraction is not "0" (113SGS218; N), the process proceeds to 113SGS220 without executing 113SGS219.

Then, in 113SGS220, the CPU 103 makes a setting for outputting all the symbol confirmation signals from the terminal board 113SG016 via the information output circuit 113SG112 (113SGS220), and proceeds to 113SGS22. When the value of the special zone counter is "0" in 113SGS216 (113SGS216; Y), a setting for outputting all symbol confirmation signals and special symbol confirmation signals from the terminal board 113SG016 via the information output circuit 113SG112 is set. Perform (113SGS221) and proceed to 113SGS22.

In 113SGS222, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set (113SGS222). When the small hit flag is set (113SGS222; Y), the setting for transmitting the hit start 4 designation command (small hit) is made (113SGS223). Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the small hit by, for example, the image display device 5) is set in the small hit display time timer (113SGS224). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the large winning opening opening number counter (113SGS225). The value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (S118), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (113SGS226).

If the small hit flag is not set in 113SGS22 (113SGS22; N), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110), and the special symbol is stopped. The process ends (113SGS228).

By executing the special symbol stop processing as described above, in the feature portion of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), when the variation display result becomes a big hit, it is in the special zone. Regardless of whether or not, both the all symbol confirmation signal and the special symbol confirmation signal are output from the terminal board 113SG016 at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 8-13 (B) and 8-13 (C), if the variation display result is lost or a small hit during the special zone, at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped. Only all symbol confirmation signals are output from the terminal board 113SG016, but if the variation display result is lost or a small hit during the non-special zone (outside the special zone), the terminal board 113SG016 at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped. Both the all symbol confirmation signal and the special symbol confirmation signal are output from.

In the feature portion of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a small hit during the special zone, only all symbol confirmation signals are output from the terminal board 113SG016 at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is a small hit during the special zone, all the symbols are displayed from the terminal board 113SG016 at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped. Both the confirmation signal and the special symbol confirmation signal may be output.

FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 5 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (113SGS231). When the jackpot end display timer is not operating (113SGS231; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time). Set (113SGS232) and end the jackpot end process.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is operating (113SGS231; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (113SGS233). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (113SGS234). If it has not elapsed (113SGS234; N), the jackpot end processing is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (113SGS234; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B (113SGS235).

When the jackpot type is probabilistic jackpot A or probabilistic jackpot B (113SGS235; Y), the probability variation flag is set (113SGS238), the time reduction flag is set (113SGS239), and "0" is set in the time reduction counter (113SGS239). 113SGS240). Further, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A (113SGS241). When the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot B (113SGS241; N), the process proceeds to 113SGS244, and when the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A (113SGS241; Y), "32" is set in the special zone counter and (113SGS242). , Set the transmission of the special zone start notification command and proceed to 113SGS244 (133SGS243).

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is non-probability variation jackpot in 113SGS235 (113SGS235; Y; N), the time saving flag is set and "100" is set in the time saving number counter, and then the process proceeds to 113SGS244 (113SGS236, 113SGS237).

Then, the 113SGS244 clears the jackpot flag and sets the transmission of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (113SGS245). Then, after setting the transmission of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the set probability change flag and the time reduction flag (113SGS246), the value of the special figure process flag is processed in the special symbol normal process. The jackpot end process is terminated by updating to "0", which is a value corresponding to (113SGS247).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 8-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 first receives from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. Determine if there is a command (113SGS251). At this time, if there is no received command (113SGS251; N), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a receive command in 113SGS251 (113SGS151; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the receive command, it is determined whether or not the receive command is the first start opening winning designation command (113SGS252). ). Then, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (113SGS252; Y), the waiting time for notifying the number of stored storages of the first is set (113SGS253). For example, in the processing of 113SGS253, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command is set to the command reception control provided in the effect control timer setting unit provided in the RAM 122 or the like. It may be set in the timer.

When the reception command in 113SGS252 is not the first start opening winning designation command (113SGS252; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second start opening winning designation command (113SGS254). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (113SGS254; Y), the waiting time for notifying the second reserved storage number is set (113SGS255). For example, in the process of 113SGS255, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer provided in the RAM 122 or the like.

When the reception command in 113SGS254 is not the second start opening winning designation command (113SGS254; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the first hold storage number notification command (113SGS256). Then, when it is the first hold storage number notification command (113SGS256; Y), for example, by initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer provided in the RAM 122 or the like, the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set. Clear (113SGS257).

When the reception command in 113SGS256 is not the first hold storage number notification command (113SGS256; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command (113SGS258). Then, when the second hold storage number notification command is used (113SGS258; Y), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared (113SGS259), for example, by initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer.

Then, after executing any of the processes of 113SGS253, 113SGS255, 113SGS257, and 113SGS259, the received command is stored in the start winning command buffer provided in the RAM 122 or the like, and the process proceeds to 113SGS251.

On the other hand, in 113SGS258, when the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command (113SGS258; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the special zone start notification command (113SGS260). When the reception command is the special zone start notification command (113SGS260; Y), the special zone middle flag indicating that the special zone is in the special zone is set, and the first hold storage display area displayed on the image display device 5 is set. The 113SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 113SG005U are hidden (113SGS261, 113SGS262), and the process proceeds to 113SGS251.

When the reception command is not the special zone start notification command (113SGS260; N) in 113SGS260, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the special zone end notification command (113SGS264). When the reception command is a special zone end notification command (113SGS264; Y), the special zone end flag is set (113SGS265, 113SGS267) to clear the special zone middle flag and set the special zone end flag indicating that the special zone has ended. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 113SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 113SG005U in the image display device 5 is started, and the process proceeds to 113SGS251 (113SGS268).

If the reception command is not the special zone end command in 113SGS264 (113SGS264; N), the setting according to the reception command is made and the process proceeds to 113SGS251 (113SGS271).

FIG. 8-16 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control process process (S75) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 updates the hold storage display displayed in the first hold storage display area 113SG005D and the second hold storage display area 113SG005U after executing the pre-reading notice setting process (S161). The hold display update process (113SGS281), the prize ball number display process (113SGS282) for displaying the prize balls paid out to the image display device 5, and the number of prize balls paid out are predetermined. After executing the prize ball number notification effect execution process (113SGS283) for executing the prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number (for example, 5000 balls, 10000 balls, etc.) has been reached, S170 to S177 (FIG. FIG. 7. Execute any of the processes (see 7).

FIG. 8-17 is a flowchart showing a prize ball number display process (113SGS282) in the effect control process process. In the prize ball number display processing, the production control CPU 120 first totals all the prize balls in the consecutive villas (the prize balls paid out by winning the large prize opening, each starting winning opening, and the general winning opening). It is determined whether or not the value of the first prize ball number counter, which is a counter for this, is being displayed on the image display device 5 (113SGS301). When the value of the first prize ball counter is not displayed on the image display device 5 (113SGS301; N), whether or not the value of the effect process flag is "6", that is, whether or not the jackpot game is in progress. It is determined whether or not (113SGS302). When the value of the effect process flag is any of "0" to "5" and "7" (113SGS302; N), the prize ball number display process is completed and the value of the effect process flag is "6". (113SGS302; Y) determines whether or not the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A (113SGS303). When the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A (113SGS303; Y), the display of the values of the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter in the image display device 5 is started, and the prize ball number display process is completed. (113SGS304). The second prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out during the big hit game of the probabilistic big hit A (the prize balls paid out by winning the big prize opening, each starting winning opening, and the general winning opening). It is a counter for counting the number of prize balls paid out in the special zone (the prize balls paid out by winning the big prize opening, each starting winning opening, and the general winning opening).

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is not the probabilistic jackpot A (113SGS303; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the probabilistic jackpot B (113SGS305). When the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot B (113SGS305; Y), the display of the value of the first prize ball counter in the image display device 5 is started and the prize ball number display process is terminated (113SGS306). When the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (113SGS305; N), the number of prize balls is not started to be displayed on the image display device 5 without starting the display of the value of the first prize ball counter or the value of the first prize ball counter. End the display process.

Further, when the value of the first prize ball counter is being displayed in 113SGS301 (113SGS301; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the effect process flag is "6" or "7", that is. , It is determined whether or not the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot is in progress (113SGS307). When the value of the effect process flag is "6" or "7" (113SGS307; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set, that is, the prize ball number notification command. Is received (113SGS308). When the prize ball number notification command reception flag is not set (113SGS308; N), the prize ball number display process is terminated, and when the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set (113SGS308; Y), the reception is performed. The number of prize balls is specified from the prize ball number notification command (113SGS309).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the second prize ball counter is being displayed on the image display device 5 (113SGS310). When the value of the second prize ball counter is being displayed on the image display device 5 (113SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 sets the number of prize balls specified in 113SG309 to the first prize ball counter and the second prize ball. In addition to adding to the number counter, the values of the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter displayed on the image display device 5 are updated and displayed (113SGS311 and 113SGS312). Then, the process proceeds to 113SGS315.

When the value of the second prize ball counter is not being displayed (113SGS310; N), the effect control CPU 120 adds the number of prize balls specified in 113SGS309 to the first prize ball counter, and the image display device 5 The value of the first prize ball counter displayed in is updated and displayed (113SGS313, 113SGS314). Then, the process proceeds to 113SGS315.

Then, in 113SGS315, the effect control CPU 120 clears the prize ball number notification command reception flag and ends the prize ball number display process (113SGS315).

Further, when the value of the effect process flag in 113SGS307 is any of "0" to "5" (113SGS307; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special zone flag is set (11SGS307; N). 113SGS316). When the special zone flag is set (113SGS316; Y), the processes of 113SG308 to 113SG315 are executed, and when the special zone flag is not set (113SGS316; N), the gaming state is specified (113SGS317). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the gaming state specified in 113SGS317 is a high base state (113SGS318).

When the gaming state is the high base state (113SGS318; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the second prize ball counter is being displayed on the image display device 5 (113SGS319). When the value of the second prize ball counter is being displayed on the image display device 5 (113SGS319; Y), the display of the value of the second prize ball counter on the image display device 5 is finished and the second prize is displayed. The value of the ball counter is reset to "0" and the process proceeds to 113SG322 (113SGS320, 113SGS321). That is, in the feature portion of the present embodiment, the aggregation of the prize balls in the second prize ball counter is completed at the timing when the special zone ends, and the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter in the image display device 5 is set. The display is finished. If the image display device 5 is not displaying the value of the second prize ball counter (113SGS319; N), the process proceeds to 113SGS322 without executing the processes of 113SGS320 and 113SGS321.

That is, when the second prize ball number counter in the present embodiment starts counting the prize balls from the jackpot game start timing of the probability variation jackpot A, and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state of the probability variation jackpot during the special zone. Is a counter that ends the counting of prize balls when the special zone ends (when the 32 fluctuation display after the big hit game of the probability variation big hit A ends). ..

In 113SGS322, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set (113SGS322). When the prize ball number notification command reception flag is not set (113SGS322; N), the prize ball number display process is terminated, and when the prize ball number notification command reception flag is set (113SGS322; Y), the reception is performed. The number of prize balls is specified from the prize ball number notification command (113SGS323). Then, the effect control CPU 120 adds the number of prize balls specified in 113SG323 to the first prize ball counter, and updates and displays the value of the first prize ball counter displayed on the image display device 5 (113SGS324). , 113SGS325), clear the prize ball number notification command reception flag and end the prize ball number display process (113SGS326). That is, in the feature portion of the present embodiment, the aggregation of the prize balls in the first prize ball counter is completed at the timing when the high base state ends, and the value 113SG005A of the first prize ball counter in the image display device 5. The display of is finished.

When the gaming state of 113SGS318 is not the high base state (113SGS318; N), that is, when the gaming state becomes the low probability low base state based on the end of 100 fluctuation displays after the end of the jackpot game of the non-probability change jackpot. Ends the display of the value of the first prize ball counter in the image display device 5 and resets the value of the first prize ball counter to "0" to end the prize ball number display process (113SGS327, 113SGS328). .. That is, the first prize ball number counter in the present embodiment is a counter that totals the number of prize balls from the start timing of the big hit game at the time of the first hit to the end timing of the 100 fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game of the non-probability change big hit. is there.

FIG. 8-18 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number notification effect execution process (113SGS283) in the effect control process process. In the prize ball number notification effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the prize ball number notification effect process timer is operating (113SGS331). When the process timer for the prize ball number notification effect is not operating (113SGS331; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the first prize ball number counter is being displayed on the image display device 5 (113SGS332). When the value of the first prize ball counter is not being displayed on the image display device 5 (113SGS332; N), the prize ball notification effect execution process is terminated, and the value of the first prize ball counter is displayed on the image display device 5. When the display is in progress (113SGS332; Y), the value of the first prize ball counter is specified (113SGS333).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the first prize ball number counter specified in 113SGS333 has reached a preset predetermined value (notification start threshold value, for example, 5000 or 10000). (113SGS334). When the value of the first prize ball number counter specified in 113SGS333 has not reached the notification start threshold value (113SGS334; N), the prize ball number notification effect execution process is terminated, and the first prize ball number counter specified in 113SGS333 When the value has reached the notification start threshold value (113SGS334; Y), the prize ball number notification production process table corresponding to the notification start threshold value is selected (113SGS334). Then, the process timer for the prize ball number notification effect is started (113SGS335). In the feature section of the present embodiment, the effect process table for the prize ball number notification effect corresponding to the prize ball number notification effect is stored in the ROM 121 in advance.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 is directed by the effect device (effect) according to the contents of the first process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, etc.) of the set prize ball number notification effect process table. The control of the image display device 5 as a visual component, the game effect lamp 9 as an effect component, the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. as the effect component) is started, and the prize ball number notification effect execution process is completed (113SGS336).

When the prize ball number notification effect process timer is operating in 113SGS331 (113SGS331; Y), the value of the prize ball number notification effect process timer is set to -1 (113SGS337), and the prize ball number notification effect process timer is set. Determines whether or not the timer has expired (113SGS338). When the prize ball number notification effect process timer is out of timer (113SGS338; Y), the prize ball number notification effect process data is switched (113SGS339). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set value of the prize ball number notification effect process timer in the prize ball number notification effect process table to the process timer (113SGS340). In addition, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, etc. included in the process data set next (113SGS341), and the award is given. The ball number notification effect execution process is terminated.

When the process timer for the prize ball number notification effect is not timered out in 113SGS338 (113SGS338; N), the effect device is controlled according to the process data corresponding to the process timer for the prize ball number notification effect (113SGS342), and the prize is awarded. The ball number notification effect execution process is terminated.

FIG. 8-19 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (113SGS351). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (113SGS351; Y), it is associated with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer. The various command data and various flags stored in the above are shifted upward by one buffer number (113SGS352). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 113SGS351 (113SGS351; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (113SGS353). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (113SGS353; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (113SGS353; Y), the start is started. The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the command buffer received at the time of winning are placed higher by one buffer number. Shift (113SGS354). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

After executing 113SGS352 or 113SGS354, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (113SGS355).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (113SGS356). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol and the small symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and sets the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol and the small symbol as the decorative symbol. Store in the display result storage area.

In the feature portion of the present embodiment, when the received variation display result specification command is the second variation display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols as stop symbols. Determines the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) aligned with "7". Further, when the received variation display result specification command is the third variation display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variation display result specification command is the fourth variation display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variation display result specification command is the first variation display result specification command corresponding to the loss, a combination of decorative symbols (loss symbols) in which the three symbols are not uniform is determined as the stop symbol.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and determines the stop symbol in which the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is associated with the numerical value. The decorative symbol and the stop symbol of the small symbol may be determined using the table. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special zone end flag is set (113SGS357). When the special zone end flag is not set (113SGS357; N), it is further determined whether or not the special zone middle flag is set (113SGS358). When the special zone flag is set (113SGS358; Y), if the decorative symbols are being displayed on the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are hidden and the process proceeds to 113SGS360 (113SGS359). If the flag in the special zone is not set (113SGS358; N), the process proceeds to 113SGS360 without executing the processing of 113SGS359.

On the other hand, when the special zone end flag is set in 113SGS357 (113SGS357; Y), the special zone end flag is cleared (113SGS361), and the special zone end notification process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected (113SGS362). ). Then, the display of the first reserved storage display area 113SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 113SG005U in the image display device 5 is started (113SGS363), and the image display device 5 is used for the non-special zone (normal high base state). The display of the background image is started (113SGS364), and the process proceeds to 113SGS360.

Next, in 113SGS360, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (113SGS365).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each lamp, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (113SGS336). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature portion of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variablely displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. , The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specification command.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (113SGS367). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (113SGS368). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The variation of the decorative pattern is realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the image display device 5 and displaying the image according to the signal by the image display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing (S172) during variable display (113SGS369).

FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart showing the variable display during effect processing (S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the respective values of the process timer, the fluctuation time timer, and the fluctuation control timer to -1 (113SGS371, 113SGS372, 113SGS373). Further, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (113SGS374). When the process timer is out of the timer (113SGS374), the process data is switched (113SGS375). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer (113SGS376). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (113SGS377), 113SGS379. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out (113SGS374; N), according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the effect device (effect component) is executed (113SGS378), and the process proceeds to 113SGS379.

Next, in 113SGS379, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the temporary stop timing of the small symbol (113SGS379). In the case of the temporary stop timing of the small symbol, as a part of the pseudo continuous effect, the small symbol is temporarily stopped with a combination indicating a loss, and the process proceeds to 113SGS381 (113SGS380). If it is not the temporary stop timing of the small symbol (113SGS379; N), the process proceeds to 113SGS381 without executing the processing of 113SGS380.

In 113SGS381, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the re-variation of the small symbol (113SGS381). When it is the start timing of the re-variation of the small symbol (113SGS381; Y), the re-variation of the temporarily stopped small symbol is started as a part of the pseudo continuous effect (113SGS382). Then, it is determined whether or not the re-variation is the final re-variation start timing (113SGS383). When it is the last re-variation start timing (113SGS383; Y), the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the first reserved storage display area 113SGS005D and the second reserved storage display area 113SGS005U in the image display device 5 (113SGS384). , The image display device 5 starts displaying the background image for the non-special zone (normal high base state) (113SGS385). Further, the display of the value of the second prize ball counter displayed on the image display device 5 is finished (113SGS386), the value of the second prize ball counter is reset to "0", and the process proceeds to 113SGS389 (113SGS387). ).

If the 113SGS381 is not the re-variation start timing of the small symbol (113SGS381; N) or the 113SGS383 is not the last re-variation start timing (113SGS383; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes the special zone end notification effect described later. It is determined whether or not it is in the period (113SGS388). If the special zone end notification effect execution period is in progress (113SGS388; Y), the process proceeds to 113SGS389, and if the special zone end notification effect execution period is not in progress (113SGS388; N), the process proceeds to 113SGS390.

In 113SGS398, the effect control CPU 120 executes a special zone end notification effect execution process (113SGS389) for executing a special zone end notification effect for notifying that the special zone has ended, and proceeds to 113SGS390.

In 113SGS390, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the display start timing of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 (113SGS390). When it is the display start timing of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 (113SGS390; Y) , The display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started and the process proceeds to 113SGS392 (113SGS391). Proceed to.

In 113SGS392, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation control timer is out of the timer (113SGS392). When the fluctuation control timer is out of timer (113SGS392; Y), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed on the next display screen of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols (30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative symbols). Image data of the screen) is created and written in a predetermined area of VRAM (113SGS393). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes fluctuation control of the decorative pattern. The display control unit 123 sends a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative symbol in the variation of the decorative symbol. Further, the predetermined value is reset in the fluctuation control timer (113SGS394), and the process proceeds to 113SGS395.

Further, when the fluctuation control timer is not timer-out (1113SGS392; N), or after the execution of 113SGS394, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer is timer-out (113SGS395). If the fluctuation time timer is out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing (S76) (S315). Even if the fluctuation time timer is not timer-out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (S314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is waited for per special figure (waiting process for the special figure). The value is updated according to S173) (113SGS397). Even if the fluctuation time timer is not timered out, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, a fluctuation pattern specification command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards is used. Even if it is received, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular fluctuation time elapses (at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol).

In the process table used for controlling the variation of the decorative symbol, the process data during the variation display of the decorative symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the process of 113SGS374 times out, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the effect control of the decorative symbol based on the process table ends. To do.

FIG. 8-21 is a flowchart showing a special zone end notification effect execution process (113SGS389) in the variable display effect process. In the special zone end notification effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special zone end notification effect process timer is operating (113SGS401). When the special zone end notification effect process timer is not operating (113SGS401; N), the special zone end notification effect process table is selected (113SGS402), and the process data 1 of the selected special zone end notification effect process table is used. The process timer for the special zone end notification effect is started (113SGS403). In the feature section of the present embodiment, the process table for the special zone notification effect corresponding to the special zone notification effect is stored in the ROM 121 in advance.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 has the contents of the first process data 1 of the set special zone end notification effect effect process table (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, game effect lamp 9 as the effect component, speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component, stick controller 31A, push button 31B) is started according to (etc.) (etc.) 113SGS404), the special zone end notification effect execution process is terminated.

When the special zone end notification effect process timer is operating in 113SGS401 (113SGS401; Y), the value of the special zone end notification effect process timer is decremented by -1 (113SGS405), and the special zone end notification effect process It is determined whether or not the timer has timed out (113SGS406).

When the process timer for the special zone end notification effect times out (113SGS406; Y), the process data is switched (113SGS407). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set special zone end notification effect process timer setting value in the special zone end notification effect process table in the process timer (113SGS408). In addition, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. that are set next (113SGS409), and special. The zone end notification effect execution process is terminated. On the other hand, when the special zone end notification effect process timer is not timer-out (113SGS406; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the special zone end notification effect process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, The effect device (effect component) is controlled according to the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc. (113SGS410), and the special zone end notification effect execution process is terminated.

By executing the variation display in the special zone as described above, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (A), the variation display of 32 times after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is completed (32 times in the special zone). If none of the fluctuation display results (variation display) is a big hit, if the fluctuation display result is lost in the special zone, the fluctuation display for 3 seconds, and if the fluctuation display result is a small hit, the fluctuation display for 4 seconds is displayed. At the end timing of each variation display, only all symbol confirmation signals out of all symbol confirmation signals and special symbol confirmation signals are output from the terminal board 113SG016. Further, at the timing when the 32nd variation display in the special zone is completed, the image display device 5 starts displaying the background image for the non-special zone and the decorative pattern, and displays the value of the second prize ball counter. Is finished.

Then, in the 33rd variation display after the end of the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A (the first variation display after the end of the special zone), the special zone end notification effect is executed, and the special zone ends for the player. Is notified. Further, at the end timing of the 33rd variation display after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is completed, both the all symbol confirmation signal and the special symbol confirmation signal are output from the terminal board 113SG016. It should be noted that both the all symbol confirmation signal and the special symbol confirmation signal are output from the terminal board 113SG016 even at the end timing of the fluctuation display after the 34th time after the end of the big hit game of the probability variation big hit A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (B), the nth (32 ≧ n ≧ 1) of the 32 fluctuation displays (32 fluctuation displays in the special zone) after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is completed. If the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probable variable big hit A, in the variable display up to the n-1th time, if the variable display result is lost, the variable display and the variable display result for 3 seconds will be displayed. If it is a small hit, the fluctuation display for 4 seconds is executed, and at the end timing of each fluctuation display, only all symbol confirmation signals out of all symbol confirmation signals and special symbol confirmation signals are output from the terminal board 113SG016. Then, the nth variation display is executed for 3 seconds, and at the end timing of the nth variation display, both the all symbol confirmation signal and the special symbol confirmation signal are output from the terminal board 113SG016.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (C), the nth (32 ≧ n ≧ 1) of the 32 fluctuation displays (32 fluctuation displays in the special zone) after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is completed. In the fluctuation display of, if the fluctuation display result is a big hit and the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot B or a non-probability variable jackpot, in the fluctuation display up to the n-1th time, if the fluctuation display result is lost, the fluctuation display for 3 seconds, If the variation display result is a small hit, the variation display for 4 seconds is executed, and at the end timing of each variation display, only all symbol confirmation signals out of all symbol confirmation signals and special symbol confirmation signals are sent from the terminal board 113SG016. It is output.

Next, in the nth variation display, the pseudo-continuous effect (temporary stop and re-variation of the small symbol) is repeatedly executed 33-n times every 3 seconds, and at the 33rd nth temporary stop timing of the small symbol, The image display device 5 starts displaying the background image for the non-special zone and displaying the decorative pattern, and finishes displaying the value of the second prize ball counter. Then, after the 33rd nth re-variation of the small symbol is started, the special zone end notification effect is executed, and the player is notified that the special zone has ended. Further, at the end timing of the nth variation display, both the all symbol confirmation signal and the special symbol confirmation signal are output from the terminal board 113SG016.

As described above, in the feature unit in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit A in the fluctuation display in the special zone, the pseudo-ream in the fluctuation display in the special zone. When a small symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a probability variation jackpot A without executing an effect, etc., while the variation display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot B or a non-probability variation jackpot in the variation display in the special zone. In, after performing a pseudo-continuous production according to the number of remaining fluctuations in the special zone to make it appear as if the special zone has ended, the small symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating the probability variation jackpot B or the non-probability variation jackpot. It has become.

Further, at the end timing of the variation display in which the variation display result in the special zone is lost, the special symbol confirmation signal is not output to the data lamp corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, the variation display result is displayed in the special zone. Since the number of fluctuations displayed on the data lamp is not added and updated until the jackpot is reached, is the fluctuation display being executed temporarily stopping the small symbol as a pseudo-continuous effect? It is difficult for the player to identify whether the small symbol is stopped in a combination indicating a loss as the main stop.

Further, when the fluctuation display result in the fluctuation display in the special zone is a big hit and the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A, in the special zone, according to the execution of the fluctuation display prior to the fluctuation display in which the probability variation jackpot A is obtained. Since the number of fluctuations displayed on the data lamp is not added and updated, the fluctuation display result is the jackpot and the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A in the first fluctuation display after the jackpot game ends on the data lamp, and the jackpot game ends for the player. It is possible to give a special feeling because the fluctuation display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit A in the first fluctuation display later.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game and the special zone will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-23 and 8-24. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 (A) and 8-23 (B), when the variable display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot A, the decorative symbol and the small symbol are the probability variation jackpot A. Derived and displayed in the combination shown, the jackpot game of probability variation jackpot A is started. At this time, the display of the value 113SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter is started in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Then, during the big hit game, each time the game ball wins the big winning opening, the starting winning opening, the general winning opening 113SG010A, 113SG010B, 113SG010C, the value 113SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter. Will be updated and displayed.

After the jackpot game is completed, as shown in FIG. 8-23 (C), the decorative symbol, the first reserved storage display area 113SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 113SG005U are hidden as special zones, and the special symbol and palpitation Then, the variable display of the small symbol is started. In the feature portion of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 (B) and 8-23 (C), the image 113SG005X during the jackpot game is continuously displayed even in the special zone. It has become. The image 113SG005X during the jackpot game is displayed until the fluctuation display of the jackpot ends in the special zone, but the fluctuation display of 32 times ends.

When the variation display is executed in the special zone where the variation display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot A, the variation display is performed as shown in FIGS. 8-23 (D) and 8-23 (E). As a result, after the small symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating the probability variation jackpot A, the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is started. At this time, the display of the value 113SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter is continuously updated and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-23 (E), when the value of the first prize ball counter reaches the notification start threshold during the special zone or the big hit game, an image display device is used as a prize ball number notification effect. At 5, the notification image 113SG005H indicating that the number of prize balls has reached the notification start threshold is displayed. In the feature section of the present embodiment, a mode in which the broadcast image 113SG005H is displayed on the image display device 5 is illustrated as a prize ball number notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize is awarded. The ball number notification effect may be executed by sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and the like.

Further, when the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit B or a non-probable variable big hit is executed in the special zone, it is shown in FIGS. 8-24 (F) to 8-24 (H). As shown, in the small symbol display area 113SG005S, temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo continuous effect) of the small symbol according to the number of remaining fluctuations in the special zone are repeatedly executed. Then, when the re-variation of the last small symbol is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-24 (I), the special zone end notification effect is executed in the image display device 5, and the special zone ends for the player. You will be notified that you have done so.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-24 (J) and 8-24 (K), the display of the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter in the image display device 5 is terminated, while the display of the decorative symbol is completed. And the display of the first reserved storage display area 113SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 113SG005U is resumed. After that, after a predetermined probability variation jackpot B or a notice effect suggesting a non-probability variation jackpot is executed, the effect symbol and the small symbol are derived and displayed in a combination indicating the probability variation jackpot B or the non-probability variation jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of prize balls during the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot A and the probabilistic jackpot B and in the high base including the special zone. The number of prize balls in the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A and in the special zone can be aggregated as the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter, and can be aggregated as the value 113SG005B of the 1st prize ball counter. As shown in the above, since the value 113SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter can be displayed on the image display device 5, the special zone during the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A The number of prize balls in the middle, high base, etc. excluding the middle and special zones can be appropriately displayed on the image display device 5.

In the feature part of the present embodiment, a jackpot gaming state which is a specific period in the present invention, a high accuracy high base state including a special zone which is a predetermined period in the present invention, and a low accuracy which is a special period in the present invention. The high base state and the small hit game state are included in the advantageous period. That is, the advantageous period in the feature portion in the present embodiment is the period in which the game ball is more likely to win in the large winning opening than in the low probability low base state, and the start winning is generated as compared with the low probability low base state. Easy period, period when the variable display result is likely to be a big hit compared to the low probability low base state, period when the big hit type is likely to be the probability variable big hit A when the variable display result is a big hit compared to the low probability low base state, Compared to the low probability low base state (or compared to the period excluding the special zone in the high accuracy high base state), the fluctuation time is short when the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is the probability variable big hit A The period is included.

In the feature portion of the present embodiment, a mode in which the value 113SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter can be displayed on the image display device 5 is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a display device different from the image display device 5, and in the display device, the value of the first prize ball counter is 113SG005A and the value of the second prize ball counter. 113SG005B may be displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is the value of the first prize ball counter, which is the sum of the number of prize balls during the big hit game of the probability variation jackpot A and the probability variation jackpot B and the number of prize balls in the high base including the special zone. Since it can be aggregated as 113SG005A, the total value of the number of prize balls in the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A and the number of prize balls in the special zone can be aggregated as the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter. , In the image display device 5, each counter is more accurate by adding the number of prize balls during the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A and the probability variation jackpot B, the number of prize balls in the special zone, and the number of prize balls excluding the special zone. The value of can be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-23, the effect control CPU 120 has a value of the first prize ball counter of 113SG005A and a value of the second prize ball counter of 113SG005B during the big hit game of the probability variation big hit A and in the special zone. Can be displayed on the image display device 5 at the same time, so that the player can simultaneously confirm the value 113SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter. Since the increase status of the value 113SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter can be confirmed at the same time, these increase status can be emphasized.

In the feature portion of the present embodiment, the value 113SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5 during the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A and during the special zone. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the first prize ball counter is 113SG005A and the second prize during the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A and during the special zone. Only one of the ball count counter values 113SG005B may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the amount of information displayed on the image display device 5 may be excessive to prevent confusion among the players.

Further, the value 113SG005A of the first prize ball counter and the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter are timings for ending the aggregation of each value (for example, if the value 113SG005A of the first prize ball counter is a non-probability change jackpot). Display only for a predetermined period from the timing when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed after the jackpot game is completed, and the timing when the fluctuation display of 32 times after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is completed if the value of the second prize ball counter is 113SG005B). You may.

Further, in the feature portion of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls during the big hit game and the number of prize balls in the high base are added up as the values of the first prize ball counter and the second prize ball counter, and the image display device. Although the form to be displayed in 5 is illustrated, the number of prize balls in the big hit game and the number of prize balls in the high base may be displayed individually on the image display device 5. Further, when the number of prize balls during the jackpot game and the number of prize balls during the high base are displayed individually in this way, the variable display of 32 times after the end of the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A ends at a specific timing (for example, the variable display ends The number of prize balls in the big hit game and the number of prize balls in the high base may be displayed in total at the timing, etc.) so that the player can pay attention to the total display.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 totals the value 113SG005A of the first prize ball counter until the 100th variation display after the end of the jackpot game of the non-probability variation jackpot ends, and the 100th variation display ends. The display of the value 113SG005A of the first prize ball counter in the image display device 5 is terminated, and the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter is changed to the probability variation jackpot A 32nd variation display after the jackpot game is completed. (Until the end of the special zone), and on the condition that the 32nd variation display is completed, the display of the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter in the image display device 5 is finished, so that the player can finish the display. By ending the display of the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter in the image display device 5, it is possible to easily recognize that the special zone has ended.

In the feature section of the present embodiment, the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter is totaled and displayed on the image display device 5 on condition that the 32nd variation display after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the second prize ball counter is at the timing when the 32nd variation display after the end of the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is completed. While the aggregation of 113SG005B is completed, the display of the value 113SG005B of the second prize ball counter in the image display device 5 may be maintained for a predetermined period (for example, a plurality of fluctuations such as 2 to 4 times). .. By doing so, even if the 32nd fluctuation display after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is completed, the number of prize balls totaled during the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A and during the special zone can be calculated by the player. Can be easily recognized.

In addition, the high-accuracy high-base state in the feature portion of the present embodiment includes a special zone until the 32 times variation display after the end of the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A ends, and 33 after the end of the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A. If the variable display result is a big hit in the special zone, including the non-special zone after the first variable display, the jackpot type is always the probability variable jackpot A, so the high accuracy after the jackpot game of the probability variable jackpot A is completed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the high base state is in the special zone, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

That is, the special zone in the feature portion of the present embodiment is the first predetermined period in the present invention, and the high accuracy and high base state excluding the special zone is the second predetermined period in which the advantage is lower than the first predetermined period in the present invention. Point to each. Further, the "advantage" referred to here refers to the ratio in which the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A when the variable display result is the jackpot.

In the feature section of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a big hit in the special zone, the big hit type is always the probability variable big hit A, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is a big hit in the special zone, the big hit type may be a probabilistic big hit B or a non-probable big hit at a lower rate than in the non-special zone.

Further, in the feature portion of the present embodiment, when the variation display result becomes a big hit in the special zone, the embodiment in which the probability variation big hit A is controlled to the big hit gaming state at a higher rate than after the special zone is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result becomes a big hit during the special zone, the probability variation jackpot B or the non-probability variation jackpot game state is set at a higher rate than after the special zone. It may be controlled. Further, in the special zone and in the non-special zone after the special zone, the display mode of the image displayed on the image display device 5, the number of fluctuations, the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol, the ratio controlled by the small hit game state, and the like are determined. It may be different. By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can execute effects having different game characteristics in the special zone and the non-special zone.

Further, when the fluctuation display result is a big hit and the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot A fluctuation display is executed in the special zone, the fluctuation display for 3 seconds is executed in the special zone as shown in FIG. 8-22. If the small symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating the probability variation jackpot A, while the variation display result is the jackpot and the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot B or the non-probability variation jackpot variation display is executed, the variation is displayed. After the special zone is completed by executing the pseudo-continuous effect according to the remaining number of fluctuations of the special zone in the display, the small symbol and the decorative symbol are derived and displayed in a combination indicating the probability variation jackpot B or the non-probability variation jackpot. If the small symbols are derived and displayed in the combination indicated by the probabilistic jackpot A in the special zone, the player can recognize that the jackpot game state of the probabilistic jackpot A, which has a large number of rounds, is controlled. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the small symbol is derived and displayed in the combination indicated by the probabilistic jackpot A, and the game interest can be improved.

In the feature section of the present embodiment, a mode is exemplified in which the small symbols are derived and displayed in the combination indicated by the probability variation jackpot A in the special zone to notify that the probability variation jackpot A is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the special zone, images other than small symbols on the image display device 5 can be displayed, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and the like. It may be notified that the jackpot gaming state of the probability variation jackpot A is controlled by the notification effect including.

Further, in the feature portion of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot A in the special zone, a small symbol is displayed in a shortened variation of 3 seconds, and a combination indicating the probability variation jackpot A is used. Although the form of derivation display (notifying the probability variation jackpot A) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation display result is a jackpot in the special zone and the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A. In some cases, as in the case where the jackpot type is probabilistic jackpot B or non-probabilistic jackpot, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the variable display, and an effect pattern is provided to notify the probabilistic jackpot A during the execution of the special zone end notification effect. You may. By doing so, it is possible to notify the probability change jackpot A at a plurality of timings in the special zone, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the non-special zone, a background image different from that in the special zone is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the player can visually recognize the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in the special zone. It can be easily recognized whether it is in the non-special zone or in the non-special zone.

In the feature section of the present embodiment, a mode in which the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is different between the special zone and the non-special zone is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the shape of the small symbol displayed on the image display device 5 and the displayed character are different between the special zone and the non-special zone, and the BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R is different. , Whether the player is in the special zone or not by executing at least one of changing the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and partially changing the shape of the game machine frame 3. It may be easy to recognize whether it is in the zone.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-23, the value of the first prize ball counter reaches a preset predetermined value (notification start threshold value, for example, 5000 or 10000) during the high base or the big hit game. Based on the above, the notification image 113SG005H indicating that the number of prize balls has reached the notification start threshold is displayed on the image display device 5 as the prize ball number notification effect. Because it is easy to understand, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the feature portion of the present embodiment, a mode in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed according to the value of the first prize ball number counter is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize ball number is not limited to this. The number notification effect may be executed according to the value of the second prize ball number counter.

Further, in the feature portion of the present embodiment, a mode in which the broadcast image 113SG005H is displayed on the image display device 5 is illustrated as a prize ball number notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize is awarded. In the ball number notification effect, every time the value of the first prize ball number counter reaches a predetermined value (notification start threshold value), an icon indicating that the prize ball number has reached the notification start threshold value is displayed on the image display device 5. It may be an effect of sequentially adding and displaying.

Further, in the feature portion of the present embodiment, in the special zone, for the fluctuation display in which the fluctuation display result is a loss or a small hit, only all the symbol confirmation signals and all the symbol confirmation signals among the special symbol confirmation signals are displayed on the terminal board. Output from 113SG016, and in the non-special zone, both the all symbol confirmation signal and the special symbol confirmation signal are output from the terminal board 113SG016 in the variation display where the variation display result is a loss or a small hit, that is, special. During the zone, the number of fluctuations displayed on the data lamp is not added and updated until the fluctuation display result becomes a big hit, so is the fluctuation display being executed temporarily stopping the small symbol as a pseudo-continuous effect? Since it is difficult for the player to identify whether the variation display is a probability variation jackpot B or a non-probability variation jackpot variation display) and whether the small symbol is stopped in a combination indicating a loss as the main stop, these pseudo-reams A signal can be output from the terminal board 113SG016 in response to the execution of the effect.

In the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a big hit in the special zone, both the all symbol confirmation signal and the special symbol confirmation signal are output from the terminal board 113SG016 at the end timing of the variation display. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result becomes a big hit in the special zone, only all symbol confirmation signals are output from the terminal board 113SG016 at the end timing of the variation display. You may try to do it.

Further, in the case of the special zone, at the end timing of the fluctuation display in which the fluctuation display result is lost, the data lamp provided from the terminal board 113SG016 to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a one-to-one correspondence is special. When the symbol confirmation signal is not output, but in the non-special zone, the variation display result is lost. At the end timing of the variation display, the terminal board 113SG016 is provided with the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a one-to-one correspondence. Since a special symbol confirmation signal is output to the data lamp, the number of fluctuations displayed on the data lamp is not added and updated until the fluctuation display result becomes a big hit during the special zone, and the fluctuation during execution is not updated. Whether the display temporarily stops the small symbol as a pseudo-continuous effect (whether the variation display is a probability variation jackpot B or a non-probability variation jackpot variation display), or whether the small symbol is stopped in a combination indicating a loss as the main stop. Is difficult for the player to identify, so the player can identify whether or not the fluctuation display is a probability variation jackpot B or a non-probability variation jackpot variation display based on the number of fluctuations displayed on the data lamp. It is possible to avoid situations such as spilling.

Further, in the feature portion of the present embodiment, all the symbol confirmation signals are output to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall, and a special symbol confirmation signal is provided one-to-one with the pachinko game machine 1. Although the form of outputting to the data lamp is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and all the symbol confirmation signals are output to the data lamp in place of the special symbol confirmation signal, and the data lamp is used. It may be possible to display the actual number of fluctuations displayed in the special zone. However, from the viewpoint that the effect of the effect in the special zone can be further enhanced, all the symbol confirmation signals are output to the management device such as the management computer of the amusement park, and the special symbol confirmation signal is output to the data lamp. Is preferable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided from the terminal board 113SG016 at the timing when the variation display is completed regardless of whether or not all the symbol confirmation signals are in the special zone. Since the output is output to a management device such as a game hall management computer, the number of fluctuations in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately grasped by the game hall management device or the like.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is a combination showing the probability variation jackpot A in the variation display in the special zone when the variation display is executed in which the variation display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A. When a small symbol is derived and displayed in the special zone, but the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probable big hit B or a non-probable big hit, a variable display is executed, after the end of the special zone in the variable display. A small symbol is derived and displayed with a combination indicating a probability variation jackpot B or a non-probability variation jackpot. That is, during the special zone, it is notified by the combination of small symbols that the probability variation jackpot A is controlled to the jackpot game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment in the special zone.

Further, in the variable display up to 32 times in the special zone after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is completed, as shown in FIG. 8-23, the image 113SG005X during the jackpot game is continuously displayed on the image display device 5. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the special zone.

Further, when the special zone ends (when the variation display of 32 times after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A ends), the effect control CPU 120 executes the special zone end notification effect in the next variation display. Further, when the variation display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot B or a non-probability variation jackpot is executed in the special zone, as shown in FIG. 8-24, a special is displayed during the variation display. Since the decorative symbol and the small symbol are derived and displayed by the combination of the probability variation jackpot B and the non-probability variation jackpot after the zone end notification effect is executed, the small symbol is the probability variation jackpot A during the display of the image 113SG005X during the jackpot game on the image display device 5. An image display device because the derivation display of the decorative symbol or small symbol in the combination indicating the probability variation jackpot B or the non-probability variation jackpot is executed through the special zone end notification effect while expecting that the combination indicating the above is displayed. Since the derivation display is not executed in the combination indicating the probability variation jackpot B or the non-probability variation jackpot while the symbol or the small symbol is displayed during the display of the image 113SG005X during the jackpot game in the image display device 5, the display of the image 113SG005X during the jackpot game in the image display device 5. The player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the small symbol is derived and displayed in the combination indicating the probability variation jackpot A.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes a variation display in which the variation display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot B or a non-probability variation jackpot in the special zone, the pseudo number of times corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations in the special zone is simulated. After executing the continuous production, the special zone end notification effect can be executed to make the player recognize that the 32 fluctuation display after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A has ended, so that the special zone has ended ( It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort with respect to (the 32 times variation display after the end of the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is completed).

Although the feature parts of the present embodiment have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to the feature parts of these embodiments, and there are changes and additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Even included in the present invention.

For example, in the feature portion of the above-described embodiment, as the playability of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming ball is awarded to the grand prize opening by launching the gaming ball toward the right gaming area 113SG002R mainly during the jackpot game. The embodiment in which the number of balls (prize balls) is increased is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a modification 1, the right gaming area 113SG002R of the pachinko gaming machine 1 From the upstream side to the downstream side, the passing gate 113SG041, the variable winning ball device 113SG006B, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 113SG007 are arranged in order, and the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 113SG041 during the right-handed hit after the big hit game. By passing through the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 113SG006B, the execution of the small hit game is made to occur frequently, and during the small hit game, the game ball wins the large winning opening to hold the ball. It may be possible to increase it. In the configuration of such a modification 1, instead of the special variable winning ball device 113SG007, a special variable winning ball device for big hits and a special variable winning ball device for small hits are provided, and special variable for big hits is provided. The winning ball device may be provided on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 113SG006B. In this way, by providing the special variable winning ball device for big hits on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 113SG006B, during the big hit game, the special variable for big hits before the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 113SG006B. Since the game ball can enter the big winning opening of the winning ball device, the big hit game can proceed smoothly.

Further, in the case where it is possible to increase the number of balls held by the game ball winning the large winning opening during the small hit game in this way, the hit probability in the variable display of the normal symbol is not related to the game state. Not all of them are the same (for example, 1/1 hit probability), and the ratio of small hits in the variable display of the second special symbol is set higher than the ratio of small hits in the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, the first). 1 Set the ratio of small hits in the variable display of the special symbol to 0, and set the ratio of small hits in the variable display of the second special symbol to 299/300).

Then, after the jackpot game of a specific jackpot type (for example, probability variation jackpot B or non-probability variation jackpot B) is completed, the variation display of the normal symbol executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 113SG041 becomes "hit". By setting the opening period of the variable winning ball device 113SG006B in the case of the first period, even if a small hit occurs, the game ball flowing down the right game area 113SG002R wins the second starting winning opening and a big prize. After the first KT state (probability change state and first KT state or low probability state and first KT state) in which it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the mouth and the jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, probability variation jackpot A), the game ball Set the opening period of the variable winning ball device 113SG006B to the second period, which is shorter than the first period, when the variation display of the normal symbol executed based on passing through the passing gate 113SG041 becomes "hit". Then, it is possible to control the large winning opening opened by the occurrence of a small hit to the second KT state (probability change state and the second KT state) in which the game ball is easier to win than the first KT state, and the big prize during the small hit game. It may be possible to prevent the number of balls held from increasing excessively due to the winning of the game ball in the mouth.

In the KT state (first KT state and second KT state), the second special symbol is changed and displayed by launching the game ball toward the right game area 113SG002R, so that the game ball is directed toward the left game area 113SG002L. This is a state in which the variation display result is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state (low accuracy state and non-KT state) in which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed by launching. That is, the KT state is an advantageous state for the player who can generate small hits more frequently than the non-KT state mainly by executing the variable display of the second special symbol.

Next, as described above, the transition of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled to the first KT state and the second KT state will be described. First, in the normal state (low probability state and non-KT state), the player mainly aims at the start winning prize to the first starting winning opening by launching the game ball toward the left game area 113SG002L. Therefore, in the normal state, the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When the variation display result is a big hit in the normal state, the game state after the big hit game is set to one of the high accuracy state and the second KT state, the high accuracy state and the first KT state, the low accuracy state and the first KT state. Be controlled. For example, after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is completed, the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy state and the second KT state, and after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot B is completed, the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy state and the first KT state, and the non-probability variation After the big hit game is completed, the game state is controlled to the low probability state and the first KT state.

In the game state after the end of these big hit games, the player aims to win a start prize in the second start winning opening or a prize in the big winning opening by launching the game ball toward the right game area 113SG002R. When the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy state and the second KT state or the high accuracy state and the first KT state, these high accuracy states and the second KT state or the high accuracy until the variation display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit again. The state and the first KT state are maintained. On the other hand, when the game state is controlled to the low probability state and the first KT state, the game state is the normal state (low probability state and the normal state) based on the completion of the 100 times variation display of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game. It is controlled to (non-KT state).

Then, during the KT state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, so that the variation display result becomes a small hit with a high probability, and the big winning opening is opened in the small hit game. Here, in the first KT state, the variable winning device 113SG006B arranged on the upstream side of the large winning opening is open for the first period with high probability even during the small hit game. Therefore, most of the game balls win the second start winning opening, and it becomes difficult to win the big winning opening. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the variable winning device 113SG006B arranged on the upstream side of the large winning opening during the small hit game is closed at a higher rate than in the first KT state, so that the first KT More game balls than in the state are designed to win the large winning opening without winning the second starting winning opening.

In the first modification of the present invention, when the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit A, the game state is always controlled to the second KT state. It is not limited, and when the variation display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot A in the normal state (low probability state and non-KT state), that is, the game ball is placed in the left game area 113SG002L. When the player launches the game ball toward the right game area 113SG002R even though the game is in the state of being launched toward, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and the variation display result is a jackpot and a jackpot type. When is a probability variation jackpot A, the gaming state may not be controlled to the second KT state (controlled to the high probability state and the first KT state) after the jackpot game is completed. By doing so, the original game playability is impaired by some players actively launching the game ball toward the right game area 113SG002R in order to execute the variable display of the second special symbol in the normal state. It can be prevented from being lost.

In the first modification, the opening period of the variable winning ball device 113SG006B is different between the first KT state and the second KT state, so that the winning ratio of the game ball to the large winning opening during the small hit game is different. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and by making the number of openings of the variable winning ball device 113SG006B different between the first KT state and the second KT state, a large winning opening during a small hit game can be obtained. The winning rate of the game ball may be different.

In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a game property of increasing the number of balls held even in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 to 8-27, during the jackpot game, the first KT The prize ball number display 113SG300, 113SG303, 113SG305 may be displayed on the image display device 5 in the state or the second KT state.

Further, during the big hit game, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 (A) to 8-25 (C), the character 1078SG301, "Big hit!", Etc. are displayed on the image display device 5 together with the prize ball number display 113SG300. When the character display 113SG302 is displayed and a game ball wins in the big winning opening, the display of the prize ball number display 113SG300 is updated at the first speed (for example, the display of the prize ball number display 113SG300 is set to 0.1 seconds. It may be updated over).

Further, in the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 8-26 (A) to 8-26 (C), the prize ball number display 113SG303 is displayed on the image display device 5, and a small hit occurs. Displays a character display 113SG304 such as "Small hit occurred!", And when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening during the small hit game in the first KT state, the display of the number of prize balls 113SG303 is displayed as a big hit game. It may be updated at the first speed as in the middle.

Then, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (A) to 8-27 (C), the prize ball number display 113SG305 is displayed on the image display device 5, and a small hit occurs. The character display 113SG306 such as "small hit has occurred!" May be displayed. Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening during the small hit game in the second KT state, a character display 113SG309 such as a character 113SG308 or "+15" as a prize ball increase display is displayed on the image display device 5 as a winning effect. , And the effect image 113SG307 may be displayed around the prize ball number display 113SG305. Then, the display of the prize ball number display 113SG305 is updated at the second speed, which is slower than the first speed (for example, the display of the prize ball number display 113SG305 is updated over 0.5 seconds), that is, a big hit game. The number of prize balls is displayed depending on whether the game ball wins the large prize opening in the first KT state or the second KT state. The number of prize balls is displayed by changing the update speed of 113SG300, 113SG303, and 113SG305. The update speed of 113SG300, 113SG303, and 113SG305 may be noticed to improve the game entertainment.

As described above, in the present modification 1, there are two patterns as patterns for updating and displaying the prize ball number display 113SG300, 113SG303, and 113SG305 (a pattern for updating and displaying the prize ball number display 113SG300 and 113SG303 at the first speed, and a prize ball. By providing (a pattern in which the number display 113SG305 is updated and displayed at the second speed), it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the number of prize balls is updated and displayed. In particular, in the present modification 1, when the small hit probability in the second KT state is set to a predetermined probability (for example, 50%, etc.), the winning frequency of the game ball into the large winning opening during the second KT state is higher than that during the big hit game. Will be low. Therefore, by updating the display of the prize ball number display 113SG305 at the second speed, which is slower than the first speed, the game ball is interrupted at the big prize opening even if the winning frequency to the big winning opening is lower than during the big hit game. Since it is possible to make the player feel as if he / she has won a prize, it is possible to have a small hit interval and improve the game entertainment.

In the present modification 1, the common large winning openings may be opened during the big hit game and the small hit game, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of large winning openings and is opened during the big hit game. The large winning opening to be played and the large winning opening to be opened during the small hit game may be different.

Further, as in the feature portion of all the embodiments and the present modification 1, a state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area 113SG002R (big hit game state, high accuracy high base state, first KT state, second KT state, etc.). In the image display device 5, a promotion image prompting the player to launch the game ball toward the right game area 113SG002R is displayed, and the game ball is displayed in the general winning opening 113SG010C provided in the right game area 113SG002R. When a prize is won, a winning sound for notifying that the game ball has won the general winning opening 113SG010C may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, a state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area 113SG002R (big hit game state, high accuracy high base state, first KT state, second KT state, etc.) as in the feature portion of all the embodiments and the present modification 1. ), When a game ball wins in the general winning openings 113SG010A and 113SG010B provided in the left game area 113SG002L, the promotion image is displayed by not notifying the winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort due to the game ball entering the left game area 113SG002L in the jackpot game state, the high accuracy high base state, the first KT state, the second KT state, or the like.

When the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state as in the first modification, the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state, and the first KT during the advantageous period in the present invention. The state, the second KT state is included.

Further, in the feature portion of the above-described embodiment, the image 113SG005X during the jackpot game is continuously displayed on the image display device 5 and the decorative symbol is hidden in the special zone after the probability variation jackpot A jackpot game is completed. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 2 as shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, in the special zone, the image is replaced with the image 113SG005X during the jackpot game. The decorative pattern may be displayed in a mode different from the normal state (low accuracy low base state) and the high accuracy high base state excluding the special zone.

When the decorative pattern is displayed in a mode different from the normal state (low accuracy low base state) and the high accuracy high base state excluding the special zone, for example, FIGS. 8-28 (A) to 8-28-. As shown in 28 (E), a plurality of "7" decorative symbols are displayed in parallel from the front side to the back side of the image display device 5 in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 113SG005L and 113SG005R. In the "middle" decorative symbol display area 113SG005C, only the decorative symbol of 1 "6" is displayed. That is, the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 113SG005L and 113SG005R from the state where the decorative symbols are stopped at the combination indicating the reach loss of the probability variation jackpot A (combination of "767"). Is shifted forward, and the decorative symbol displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 113SG005C is rotated in the horizontal direction to execute the variable display. Further, the small symbol may be displayed in a variable manner in the same manner as the feature portion of the embodiment in conjunction with the decorative symbol.

In addition, in the variable display of the loss in these special zones, the decorative symbol and the small symbol are derived and displayed by the combination of the reach loss of the probability variation jackpot A (combination of "767"). In this way, by deriving and displaying the decorative symbol and the small symbol in the special zone by the combination of the reach loss of the probabilistic jackpot A, the decorative symbol and the small symbol are derived and displayed by the combination of the probabilistic jackpot A in the special zone. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not (whether or not the notification of the probability variation jackpot A is executed by the combination of the decorative symbol and the small symbol).

Further, in the variation display of the loss in the special zone, the variation display ends in 3 seconds (the variation display is executed according to the variation pattern of PA1-4 shown in FIG. 8-5), so that the decorative symbol and the small symbol are displayed. Is derived and displayed every 3 seconds with a combination of reach loss of probability variation jackpot A, and it is more effective for the player to determine whether or not the decorative symbol and the small symbol are derived and displayed with the combination of probability variation jackpot A in the special zone. It is possible to draw attention.

When the variation display result is a big hit and the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot B or a non-probability variation jackpot variation display is executed in the special zone, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (F) to 8-29 (K). In addition, if the pseudo-continuous production of the number of times corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations in the special zone is executed, and the decorative symbol and the small design are derived and displayed in a combination indicating the probability variation jackpot B or the non-probability variation jackpot via the special zone end notification effect. Good.

As described above, in the special zone in the modified example 2, the shortened fluctuation display for 3 seconds is continuously executed, and when the fluctuation display result is lost, the decorative symbol and the small symbol are probabilistically changed jackpot A. By deriving and displaying by the combination of reach loss of, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the jackpot game of probability variation jackpot A is executed again in succession to the jackpot game of probability variation jackpot A that triggered the special zone. Is possible. Further, when the variable display result becomes a big hit in the special zone, the decorative symbol and the small symbol are always derived and displayed in a combination indicating the probability variation jackpot A (the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot depending on the combination of the decoration symbol and the small symbol). Since it is notified that it is A), it is possible to give the player a special feeling that the decorative symbol and the small symbol are derived and displayed in the combination indicating the probability variation jackpot A in the special zone.

Further, in the variation display of the probability variation jackpot A in the special zone, the variation display ends in 3 seconds in the same manner as the variation display of the loss (the variation display is executed according to the variation pattern of PC1-1 shown in FIG. 8-5). Therefore, the decorative design and the small design are suddenly derived and displayed as a combination of the probability variation jackpot A, which can give the player a surprising feeling and shorten the interval between the jackpot games of the continuous probability variation jackpot A. Because it can be done, the hobby of the game can be improved.

Further, the feature portion of the above-described embodiment illustrates a mode in which the number of prize balls given to the image display device 5 during a big hit game, a special zone, a high base, etc. can be displayed. The image display device 5 may be able to display the net increase in the number of game balls during these big hit games, in the special zone, in the high base medium, and the like. By doing so, the player can more accurately grasp the number of game balls acquired by the player.

Further, in the feature portion of the embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine (so-called type 1 machine) capable of executing a variable display of a special symbol and controlling the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the big hit game state based on the variable display of the special symbol, and can be placed in the big prize opening during the small hit game. It may be a gaming machine (so-called type 1 type 2 mixing machine) capable of controlling a jackpot gaming state based on passing through a specific area provided. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is such a type 1 type 2 mixing machine, in a normal state, a game ball is launched into the left game area to execute a variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is displayed. When the big hit game state is controlled based on the variable display of the symbol, the small hit game state based on the variable display of the second special symbol is launched by launching the game ball into the right game area in the high base state after the end of the big hit game. It is a game property in which a game ball is made to enter the specific area and controlled to a big hit game state.

Then, the first special period for executing the variation display of the predetermined number of times of the second special figure in the high base state and the remaining time reduction number of times are 0 times, and the second special symbol is based on the four second special figure hold memories. In the second special period in which the variation display is executed, different effects may be executed depending on whether or not the variation display result is a big hit or a small hit.

For example, when the fluctuation display result is a big hit or a small hit in the fluctuation display of the first special period, the pseudo-continuous production of the number of times corresponding to the remaining fluctuation number of the first special period is executed in the fluctuation display, and the second In the variable display during the special period, it may appear that the effect symbol is derived and displayed by a combination of a big hit and a small hit.

Further, in the embodiment and the feature unit, in the variation display in which the variation display result in the special zone is a jackpot and the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot A, all symbol confirmation signals and special symbols are confirmed at the end timing of the variation display. Although the form of outputting both signals has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variation display in which the variation display result in the special zone is a jackpot and the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot A, the variation display is performed. It is also possible to output only all symbol confirmation signals at the end timing of.

Further, in the feature portion of the embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is specialized by transmitting a special zone start notification command and a special zone end notification command from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). Although the embodiment in which it can be determined whether or not the player is in the zone is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 is based on the number of fluctuations displayed after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is completed. It may be determined whether or not it is in the special zone. In this way, when the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is in the special zone based on the number of fluctuations displayed after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A ends, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is in the special zone, the CPU 103 determines the special zone start notification command or the special zone end notification. Since it is not necessary to send a command, these special zone start notification commands and special zone end notification commands may be excluded from the effect control commands.

Further, in the feature portion of the above-described embodiment, the mode of shifting to the special zone only after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A ends is illustrated, but the transition to the special zone is made even after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot B ends. May be good.

Further, in the feature portion of the above-described embodiment, the period until the special zone is executed 32 times of the special figure game (32 times variable display) in the high accuracy and high base state after the big hit game of the probability variation jackpot A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special zone is a special figure game of 32 times in a high base state (regardless of high accuracy or low accuracy) after the end of the big hit game. It may be the period until the execution of. That is, the player may move to the special zone after the non-probability change jackpot jackpot game is completed.

Further, as described above, in the case where the special zone can be transferred after the completion of a plurality of big hit games, the number of special figure games (variable display number) controlled in the special zone is changed according to the completed big hit game. May be good.

Further, in the feature portion of the above-described embodiment, when the variation display result is a big hit and the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot A in the variation display in the special zone, the variation pattern of the variation display is set to the special figure variation time of 3 seconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as described above, in the case of a form in which the special zone can be transferred after the completion of a plurality of big hit games. , The jackpot type targeted by the fluctuation pattern of PC1-1 may be different in the special zone according to the finished jackpot type. For example, when the player shifts to the special zone after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot B ends, the variation pattern of the variation display is changed when the variation display result is the jackpot and the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot B in the variation display in the special zone. When the special figure fluctuation time is executed in the fluctuation pattern of PC1-1 of 3 seconds and the game shifts to the special zone after the jackpot game of the non-probability variable jackpot is completed, the fluctuation display result is a jackpot in the fluctuation display in the special zone. When the jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot, the variation pattern of the variation display may be executed with the variation pattern of PC1-1 having a special figure variation time of 3 seconds.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention corresponds to an advantageous period advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state, a low accuracy high base state, a high accuracy high base state including a special zone, and a small hit gaming state). A game machine capable of executing control (for example, a pachinko game machine 1), and a game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a prize ball) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a prize ball process) and an effect. (For example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process process) and a game value totaling means (for example, the effect control) capable of totaling the game value given by the game value assigning means. The CPU 120 for executing the processing of 113SGS308 and 113SGS319 of the prize ball number display processing shown in FIG. 8-17 and the total value display means capable of displaying the total value totaled by the game value totaling means (for example, effect). The control CPU 120 includes a portion for executing the processing of 113SGS309 and 113SGS320 of the prize ball number display processing shown in FIG. 8-17, and the advantageous period includes a specific period (for example, a jackpot gaming state) and the specific period. A predetermined period (for example, a high-accuracy high-base state including a special zone) in which a specific notification effect that is advantageous to the player is executed, which is a period connected to the specific period and the degree of advantage for the player is different from the specific period, and the specific period. The game value aggregating means is given by the game value giving means in the advantageous period, including a period and a special period (for example, a low probability high base state) in which the advantage for the player is different from the predetermined period. The first aggregated value (for example, the value of all the prize balls paid out during the consecutive villas), which is the aggregated value of the game value, can be aggregated, and the above-mentioned is said during the specific period and the predetermined period. The second aggregated value, which is the aggregated value of the game value given by the game value giving means (for example, the number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot A and the number of prize balls paid out during the special zone). The total value display means can display the first total value and the second total value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-23, the total value was paid out during the consecutive villas. The value of the first prize ball counter, which is the total value of all the prize balls, 113SG005A and the total value of the number of prize balls paid out during the big hit game of the probability variation big hit A and the total number of prize balls paid out during the special zone. The value of the second prize ball counter, 113SG005B, can be displayed on the image display device 5), and for the player. A suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. The title notifying means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) is provided, and the title notifying means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example,). 10 (D), (F)) A game machine can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, the aggregated value in the advantageous period can be appropriately displayed. In addition, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine in which the aggregated value in the advantageous period can be appropriately displayed and the effect of the effect can be enhanced, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) which is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), and a suggestion effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) suggesting that the machine is controlled in the advantageous state, and the suggestion. A title notification means (for example, a production control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the effect is provided, and the title notification means provides a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect. Examples thereof include gaming machines that can be notified (for example, FIGS. 10 (D) and 10 (F)). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, the feature portion 31AK of another form example will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 9A, in this embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is “loss”. , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the display result is "loss". The variation pattern of reach loss is PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the display result is "big hit". PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, in this embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 9 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super reach B <The order is higher in the order of Super Reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 9A and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 9A shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 9B, the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively fueled and the effect of the effect is improved. The mode of notification of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typeface (Semi-cursive, regular script, etc.) of the title characters may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of production operation of feature section 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in this embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing the effect control process process based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. 10 and 11 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation according to this embodiment. FIG. 10A shows that the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. .. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” stop, and the reach mode is established. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 10C, the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction portion of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the entire screen of the image display device 5 is as shown in FIG. 10 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 10 (E), the character 31AK003, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and in the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When displaying the dialogue on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 10 (E), and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 10C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B (here) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 10 (F). Then, the characters "SP reach B") are displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is notified. To. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 10 (G), the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

Further, in Super Reach A (FIG. 10 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (FIG. 10 (C) → (F) → (G) ...), the titles are different. In the introduction part until the notification, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 10 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is notified, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made to have a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to identify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 10 (H), the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the title of Super Reach D is notified by outputting the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "defeat the enemy") from the speaker 8. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the Super Reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 10 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the degree of jackpot reliability of reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 10 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during the reach production. Although FIG. 10 (I) shows the same effect contents as those in FIG. 10 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to Super Reach D may be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 10 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is executed. To.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 11A, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the characters “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to displaying the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped to notify the title (FIGS. 10 (D), (F), (FIGS. 10 (D), (F), (F)). H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach having high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped to notify the title.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has passed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display areas for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, and the display areas for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different or the display place may be different as in this embodiment.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 10 (H) and the like, the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, and corresponds to the expectation degree. The numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 10 (H) or the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of steps of the degree of expectation may be increased.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of the effect.

Although the production operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11B, a determination effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 11 (C), and the big hit combination is displayed as shown in FIG. 11 (D). A fixed decorative pattern is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative pattern that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified even during the reach production, the notification of the title is terminated before the determined production is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the determined production, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to execute the variable display. The method of displaying the decorative pattern of is arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 5 displays the hold display, the active display, the character that is residently displayed during the variable display, and the display related to mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of the super reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to draw attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 12 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 12 (B) shows. As shown, the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 12C, the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 12 (D), the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 12, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing the title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 12 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. You may do so. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 10 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 was designed to display the black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first and gradually. It is also possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect that suggests the expectation by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 13 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 13C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK0221. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white stars. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 13 (D) and 13 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation suggestion display 31AK021, the black stars are highlighted as shown in FIG. 13 (F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has been completed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 13 (A) to 13 (F), the black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree suggestion display is increased by one step, but two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. Also, half a black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output in some cases. By doing so, the expectation suggestion effect becomes various and the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of steps of expectation that increases at one time, the same image of the black star is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, the effect based on the command is executed in a different effect mode. In each effect mode, the background, characters, motifs, sounds output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

13 (G) to 13 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 13A to 13F. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 13 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 13 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 13 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK024. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white rhombuses. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 13 (J) and 13 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 13 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 13 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). ) May be different. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution rate of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's preference, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, a button is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 14 (B). The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 14 (C), the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the character "SP reach C") is displayed, so that the super reach C is displayed. The title of reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to a title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 15 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is notified. After that, as shown in FIG. 15B, the title notice that the display color of the title 31AK030 changes to red is executed. In this way, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 15, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that is controlled to the jackpot advantageous state and the expectation level is improved, such as the advance notice effect and the development effect. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the superreach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 17A, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “missing”. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), the display color of the title of Super Reach changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Things that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of the change in the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 15, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of change timings may be provided and the change timing may be determined as one of them. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 17 (A) in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. 17 (B) is used in the special mode. Determine the title display color at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode of the character's lines (for example, the display color of the lines) in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 17C, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “missing”. As shown in FIG. 17 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach production are provided to change from "white", "red", and "white" to "red", and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. If the display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the timing of each change between the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is completed.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be executable. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 17, but the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a unified notice effect, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title and the dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or may be different from the title notice. The rate of change in which production mode (ratio of action) may be different from that of the dialogue notice, or the rate of change in what color (in what stage) may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one of the title and the dialogue is produced (display color) according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player pays attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 5, a sub-liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after notifying the title on the image display device 5, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. By doing so, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be easily understood.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different in the image display device 5 is executed, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Eliminate enemies with a stick controller", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification example 1 of feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a deciding effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). 11 (B) to 11 (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is displayed according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

18 and 19 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 18A, after the image display device 5 is in the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18B, the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character 31AK042 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 18 (C) to 18 (F) and 19 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 18C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 18D, the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18E, the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 changes to the large button image 31AK047. Changes to.

After that, as shown in FIG. 19 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 19 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before the predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 19 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 19 (K). , A display prompting the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, the image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 19 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 19 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation validity period, the image shown in FIG. 19 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and when an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability of is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to a highly reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect is improved and the player's expectation is increased. Can be maintained.

Although the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted in the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, they are appropriately performed in parallel with the reach effect and operation effect shown in FIGS. 18 and 19. It may be executed. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, display of operation effect image, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Modification example 2 of feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title production, the production of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach production is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the reliability of the jackpot when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red letters). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 notifies the speaker 8 to output a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 9 emits the light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 20 is a display screen view when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 20A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 20 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 20 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 20 (e) is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When a friendly character wins a battle with an enemy character, the characters "Battle win!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 20 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 20A and 20D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 include all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image and are displayed. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 20A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 20D. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 20A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 20D are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 16 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation of configuration for other feature parts)
Next, other feature parts in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. This feature unit makes it possible to control an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the set value, and makes it possible to change the set value based on a predetermined setting change operation. It is equipped with a configuration that allows the set values to be confirmed by display. Then, the set value can be displayed by the configuration that can display the information on the game value such as the prize ball given based on the entry of the game medium such as the game ball into the predetermined area.

FIG. 21-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to this feature portion. The same reference numerals are given to the configurations common to the above-described embodiments. For example, the output circuit 111 may have the same configuration as the solenoid circuit 111. The first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B may have the same configuration as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The effect display device 5 may have the same configuration as the image display device 5. When the display result is "missing" (hiragana), it is the same as when the display result is "missing" (katakana). The first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D are game balls that have passed (entered) any one of a plurality of general winning openings 10. Is detected, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection.

The effect control board 12 is connected to the operation motors AK011 to AK014 for driving the movable member serving as the movable accessory (movable effect device) and the origin sensors AK021 to AK024 for detecting the origin position of the movable member. .. The operating motors AK011 to AK014 may be those using a motor, an electromagnetic solenoid, or the like. The origin sensors AK021 to AK024 may be configured by using a contact type sensor such as a micro switch or a non-contact type sensor such as a photo sensor or a capacitance type sensor. The effect control board 12 is provided with a real-time clock (RTC) 126 capable of outputting time information.

In this embodiment, when the small hit game state is controlled, the second large winning opening provided separately from the first large winning opening, which is the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, is It becomes an open state in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the second large winning opening is opened during the period until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. Make it a state. In this embodiment, the second big winning opening is set to open once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses in the small hit game state, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be opened a plurality of times in the small hit game state. The 2nd prize opening is opened by the 2nd prize door when the solenoid 83 for the 2nd prize door is on, and the game ball passes (enters) the 2nd prize door. It will be easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the 2nd big prize opening door is off, the 2nd big winning opening is closed by the 2nd big winning opening, and the game ball passes through the 2nd big winning opening ( Entry) is disabled. In this way, the second major winning opening changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the second prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state is provided in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the second prize opening. You may.

The count switch 23 is a first count switch that detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first winning opening. The game ball that passes (enters) the second prize-winning opening is detected by the second count switch by passing through the second count switch installed in the second prize-winning opening. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the second major winning opening that has been opened, the game ball passes (enters) other normal winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. ) More prize balls will be paid out. Therefore, when the second big winning opening is opened, the game ball can enter the second big winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the second prize opening is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to pass (enter) the game ball through the second prize opening to obtain the prize ball, which is disadvantageous to the player. There are two states.

Inside the second prize opening, a third count switch and a fourth count switch through which a game ball can pass are installed. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second special winning opening passes through either the third count switch or the fourth count switch and is guided to the back side of the game board 2. The game ball is detected by the third count switch by passing through the third count switch. The game ball is detected by the 4th count switch by passing through the 4th count switch.

In this embodiment, the game state after the end of the small hit game is controlled to the big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the third count switch during the small hit game. Therefore, during the period when the second big winning door is open during the small hit game, if the course of the game ball is changed by adding vibration or the like and the game ball is detected by the third count switch, Since fraud that is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player becomes possible, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is designed to stop the game in such a case.

Inside the second prize opening, a regulating member that regulates and allows the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch is provided. The regulating member is provided so as to be able to change between a regulated state that regulates the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch and a permissible state that allows the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch. Has been done.

In the small hit game state, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening passes through the third count switch, it becomes a "big hit" based on the passage of the third count switch of the game ball (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the game state to the big hit game state based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the third count switch. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening in the small hit game state passes through the fourth count switch, it does not become a "big hit". That is, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the gaming ball by the fourth count switch.

Then, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch of the game ball, the period until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or the predetermined number (for example, 29 seconds) of the second big winning opening door For example, the second major winning opening is opened during the period until 10) winning balls are generated. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second major winning opening is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player. In this embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch, the second big winning opening is controlled to the first state. The first prize opening may be controlled to the first state without limitation.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second major winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "15" or "5"). Even before the number of times the round game is executed reaches the upper limit, the round game may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball did not win the second prize opening). Good.

FIG. 21-2 is a rear view showing a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a power supply board 17, and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 201. The main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 29 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 29 also has a function of displaying various winning information related to winning. A display changeover switch 30 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 29, and the information displayed on the display monitor 29 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 30.

The main board 11 has a door opening sensor 90 that detects the opening of the glass door frame that covers the front surface of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a large winning opening for detecting the opening of the first and second large winning openings. Various sensors such as the door sensor 91 are connected, and it also has a function of determining the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) based on the detection signals output from these sensors. The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The main substrate 11 is enclosed in a substrate case 201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, a display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of the main substrate 11, and a display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 29. The display changeover switch 30 is arranged. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (first winning opening, second major winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, general winning opening, hereinafter, "entrance area". The number of game balls entering the game is totaled, and various winning information such as the ratio and the winning ratio are displayed on the display monitor 29, and these winning information are displayed. As a result, various winning information such as the ratio and the role ratio after installation in the amusement park can be confirmed. On the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed (verified) whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, whether or not adjustments have been made, what kind of adjustments have been made, and as a result of the adjustments, the game balls enter the general winning opening as often as designed. It is confirmed (verified) whether it is. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence / absence and contents of adjustment after installation.

The power supply board 17 is configured so that power from an AC power supply (AC100V), which is an external power supply (commercial power supply), can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. ing. The power supply board 17 is enclosed in a board case 202 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a lock switch 51 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is set on the upper right side of the back surface of the power supply board 17. A setting changeover switch 52 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) in the changed state is provided. Further, the power supply board 17 is provided with a clear switch AK001 and a power supply switch AK002.

The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the staff in possession can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 51 requires key operation, only the staff who has the key to operate the lock switch 51 can operate the lock switch 51 among the staff in the game hall. The lock switch 51 is a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, and is also a switch capable of performing an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation).

When the power-on operation using the power switch AK002 is performed, a predetermined operation using the lock switch 51 or the clear switch AK001 such as an on / off switching operation of the lock switch 51 and a pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 is performed. May be called. The lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 may perform a predetermined operation using these switches at the same time as the power is turned on by using the power switch AK002. Therefore, at least, the lock switch 51, the clear switch AK001, and the power switch AK002 may be arranged at positions that can be simultaneously operated by a staff member of the amusement park or the like. In this way, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 can detect various operations such as on / off switching operation and pressing operation by the staff of the amusement park or the like as the power is turned on by using the power switch AK002. It is configured in.

At the lower part of the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, a nozzle (discharge port) for discharging the game ball that has won a prize in each winning port or the game ball that has entered the out port to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 is provided, and the inside of the nozzle is provided. Is provided with a discharge port switch 70 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a launched game ball). The signal from the outlet switch 70 is taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11.

FIG. 21-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that this command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

The command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or an effect symbol. In the variable display result notification command, when the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit" (predetermined result), or when the variable display result is "big hit". Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (decision result of the jackpot type) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used.

The variation display result notification command includes, for example, commands 8C00H to 8C05H. The command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variation display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variation display result is "small hit A". The command 8C05H is a sixth variation display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variation display result is "small hit B".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 5. The command 9000H is a RAM clear notification command that notifies that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been cleared due to the initialization by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power supply by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. Is. The command 9100H is a setting change start command that specifies the start of the setting change state that enables the setting value to be changed when the power supply by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that specifies the execution of the power failure recovery process corresponding to the power failure recovery. Command 93XXH is a setting change end command that specifies the end of the setting change state.

In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to the setting value newly set by the change may be set. In this case, different EXT data is set according to the setting value newly set by the change in the setting change state or the setting value continuously set without being changed. When the set value consists of three stages from 1 to 3, the command 9300H specifies that the set value is set to "1", and the command 9301H specifies that the set value is set to "2". Then, the command 9302H may specify that the set value is set to "3". Alternatively, as the setting change end command, only the command 9300H whose EXT data is 00H is prepared, and the end of the setting change state may be specified by the command 9300H regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, as an effect control command different from the setting change end command, a setting value specification command for specifying the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prepared. The setting value specification command corresponds to the fluctuation start at each time of the special figure game, for example, with the transmission of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command, in addition to the case where the setting change end command is transmitted. May be sent. Further, a set value designation command may be transmitted as the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times, for example, every 10 variation starts in the special figure game. Instead of these, or in addition to these, a setting value designation command may be transmitted in association with the transmission of the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command. A setting value specification command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the customer waiting demo specification command.

The command 9400H is a setting confirmation start command that specifies the start of the setting confirmation state that enables the setting value to be confirmed when the power supply by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. Command 9401H is a setting confirmation end command that specifies the end of the setting confirmation state. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process. The command 9F00H is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen (demo screen display) by displaying the effect image corresponding to the progress stop of the game in the customer waiting state.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a command designated during the opening of the big winning opening, which specifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a command designated after opening the large winning opening that specifies the period during which the large winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variation display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. , The first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H indicates that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. Based on this, it is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D100H is a V winning notification designation command for notifying that the third count switch is turned on by passing the game ball through the third count switch, that is, that the V winning is won. In the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may control to execute the V prize notification effect that notifies that the V prize has been won based on the reception of the V prize notification designation command. In the V winning notification effect, different effect patterns may be determined according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the determination ratios of the plurality of effect patterns may be different. In this way, the set value may be suggested depending on the effect mode of the V prize notification effect. For example, as the effect mode of the V prize notification effect, when the effect image indicating "V" is rotated and displayed, the effect mode in which the rotation direction is clockwise and the effect mode in which the rotation direction is counterclockwise are included. You may be. Alternatively, a plurality of production modes in which the display colors of the production images indicating "V" are different may be included. Then, the set value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the V prize notification designation command. As a result, when the V winning notification effect is executed, the effect mode according to the set value can be appropriately determined.

FIG. 21-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value which is a random number for a game counted on the side of the main board 11. In this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination are used. Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

In this embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each random value MR1 to MR5 is illustrated. May be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 21-5 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss is also referred to as a non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern of reach loss is also referred to as a reach fluctuation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is "big hit" is also referred to as a big hit fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is "small hit" is also referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, a plurality of normal reach α, normal reach β, ... A variation pattern may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

In the ROM 101, for example, a display result judgment table (setting value 1), a display result judgment table (setting value 2), a display result judgment table (setting value 3), a jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol), and a jackpot type judgment A table (for the second special symbol), a small hit type determination table, etc. are stored.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit and a small hit changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the highest payout rate, and the larger the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the larger the value in the order of 2 or 3, the lower the advantage is stepwise.

FIG. 21-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. In the display result determination table, a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). There is, that is, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

FIG. 21-6 (A) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, the set value is ". It is set because a big hit is won with a higher probability (1/99) than in the case of "2" and "3", and a part of these judgment values is set as a judgment value corresponding to a small hit. The small hit is won with a higher probability (1/50) than when the values are "2" and "3". When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first. Even when the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the jackpot has the same probability (1/99) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. Since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability (100/200) is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. ) To win a small hit.

FIG. 21-6 (B) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2. When using the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 2, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the jackpot is hit with a lower probability (1/150) than when the set value is "1". By winning and some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a lower probability (1/99) of small hits than when the set value is "1". You are supposed to win. When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 2 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first. Even when the judgment value of is set and the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the jackpot has the same probability (1/150) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. Since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. , The small hit is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set value is "1".

FIG. 21-6 (C) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3. When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 3 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is If it is not set, and therefore the first special symbol is the target of variable display, it will be a big hit with a lower probability (1/200) than when the set values are "1" and "2". Wins, but does not win small hits (winning probability: 0). When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 3 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is the same as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first. Even when the judgment value of is set and the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the jackpot has the same probability (1/200) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. Since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. , The small hit is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set values are "1" and "2".

The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit A to) with respect to the special symbol. Decide to make a jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Determining whether or not to make a jackpot means determining whether or not to control the jackpot game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is a jackpot symbol. It also means deciding whether or not to do it. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but stop at the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol. In this way, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state differs depending on the set value. Therefore, if the set value is changed, 1 is set in a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player. Will be changed to another setting.

In this embodiment, in each display result determination table, the winning probabilities of small hits when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second are all the same, but the small hits are in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. The winning probability may be low. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the winning probability of the small hit is reduced in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3, but it is the same as the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the second. In addition, the same winning probability may be used for all the set values.

In this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table to determine whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. However, the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are separately provided to determine whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. Judgment is made using a common table for the case of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the case of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer, and the judgment of the small hit is performed. A separate table may be used for the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first and the case where the buffer is the second.

In this embodiment, when the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, a judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is used as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit. It was not set, that is, the small hit was not won, but a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit so that the small hit is won. It may be. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

In this embodiment, a total of three setting values, 1 to 3, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to is 2 or 4 or more (for example, 6). Further, the player's advantage according to the set value is not limited to the one in which the smaller the set value, the higher the advantage for the player, and the larger the set value, the higher the advantage for the player. May be good. For example, when the set value consists of 6 levels from 1 to 6, 1 has the lowest ball output rate, and the larger the value in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the ball output rate, and 6 is. It may be the one with the highest ball output rate. In this way, the larger the value, the lower the advantage for the player when 1 is set as the set value, and the highest advantage for the player when 6 is set. The advantage may be gradually increased.

FIG. 21-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a large hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. Referenced to determine. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variation display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to small hit A or small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the hit type. Referenced to determine. In this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type D is executed. It has become. Further, when the game ball passes through the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type E is executed. .. These jackpots D and jackpot E are not the jackpot types determined by the random value MR2 for determining the hit type extracted at the time of starting winning, but the game ball is the first during the small hit game of either the small hit A or the small hit B. It is a jackpot type determined by whether or not it has passed the 3-count switch.

FIG. 21-7 (A) shows a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol). The jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) uses the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) to select the jackpot type. Referenced when deciding.

FIG. 21-7 (B) shows a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol). The jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) uses the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed) to select the jackpot type. Referenced when deciding.

FIG. 21-7 (C) shows a small hit type determination table. The small hit type determination table is referred to when determining the small hit type regardless of whether the game ball is a reserved memory based on which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening is won. ..

FIG. 21-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the jackpot types include jackpot A and jackpot D in which the time saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot E in which the time saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. It is set. Of these jackpots A to E, jackpot C and jackpot E are considered to be the most advantageous jackpots for the player, and jackpots A and jackpot D are considered to be the most disadvantageous jackpots for the player. Further, since the big hit E is a big hit that is more advantageous than the big hit D, the small hit B is a small hit that is more advantageous than the small hit A.

Of these jackpots A to jackpot E, jackpot A is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed five rounds (so-called five rounds) that change the first jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit A. The jackpot B is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) that change the first jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit B, the time saving control is executed until the special figure game is executed 20 times or until the big hit occurs again by the time when the special figure game is executed 20 times. The jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) that change the first jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit C, the time saving control is executed until the special figure game is executed 100 times or until the big hit occurs again by the time when the special figure game is executed 100 times. The jackpot D is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) that change the second big winning opening into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit D. The jackpot E is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 14 rounds (so-called 14 rounds) that change the second jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit E, the time saving control is executed until the special figure game is executed 100 times or until the big hit occurs again by the time when the special figure game is executed 100 times.

The jackpot D and the jackpot E have the jackpot to be opened as the second jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot D and the jackpot E are the jackpots to be opened. , May be the first prize opening. That is, for the small hit game, the second big prize opening is opened, and for the big hit D and the big hit E based on the occurrence of the V prize during the small hit game, the first big hit game is replaced with the second big prize opening. All you have to do is open the big prize opening.

In the time-saving state, a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state because the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" increases. For this reason, in the time saving state, a big hit may occur as a result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, or a big hit may occur when the game ball wins a V during the small hit game, so that the big hit game state is normal. It tends to occur continuously without going through the state, and it becomes a so-called continuous chan state.

In the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 20 times, so that a small hit occurs during the 20 special figure games and the game ball is the first. The rate of passing through the 3-count switch (the rate at which a game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs during 20 special game games) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit C and the big hit E, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 100 times, so that a small hit occurs during the 100 special figure games. , The rate at which the game ball passes through the third count switch (the rate at which the game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs during 100 special figure games) is set to almost 100%.

In this embodiment, five types of jackpots A to E are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more jackpot types may be provided, and 4 The following types may be provided.

In the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", 0 to 49 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A, and 50 ~ 149 are assigned to jackpot B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B. 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 150 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B. 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit B or the big hit C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. I am trying to be.

In the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", 0 to 29 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A, and 30 ~ 99 are assigned to jackpot B, and 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 69 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 70 to 269 are assigned to the jackpot B. 270 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 199 is assigned to the jackpot A, and 200 to 269 are assigned to the jackpot B. 270 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. In this way, when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the jackpots B and C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the jackpot game is the jackpot in the special symbol game of the first special symbol. Is higher than when the above occurs, and the set values are lowered in the order of 1, 2, and 3.

In this embodiment, when the set value is 1, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to jackpot C is the highest, then the percentage of determining jackpot B is high, and the percentage of determining jackpot A is high. The lowest (Big hit type determination ratio in set value 1: Big hit C> Big hit B> Big hit A). When the set value is 2, the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B at the highest rate, followed by jackpot A at the highest rate, and jackpot C is determined at the lowest rate (set value). Big hit type determination ratio in 2: Big hit B> Big hit A> Big hit C). Further, when the set value is 3, the rate of determining the jackpot type as jackpot A is the highest, then the rate of determining the jackpot B is the highest, and the rate of determining the jackpot C is the lowest. (Big hit type determination ratio in set value 3: Big hit A> Big hit B> Big hit C).

Depending on the set value, there may be one or more jackpot types that have not been determined among the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. Included in determining by percentage.

In the small hit type judgment table, when the set value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the small hit A, and 100 to 299 are small. It is assigned to hit B. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 149 are assigned to the small hit A, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B. There is. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 199 are assigned to the small hit A, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B. There is. In this way, when a V-winning jackpot occurs during the small hit game, the ratio of determining the jackpot E, in which the number of special figure games in which the time reduction control is executed after the jackpot game ends is 100, is 20 times. It is higher than the ratio for determining the jackpot D, and is lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

In this embodiment, when the set value is 1, the small hit B is determined at a higher rate than the small hit A as the small hit type, so that a V prize is generated during the small hit game. The rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot E is higher than the rate at which the jackpot type is determined based on the above (the percentage of the jackpot type determined by the V prize at the set value 1: jackpot E> jackpot D). Further, when the set value is 2, the small hit A and the small hit B are determined at the same ratio as the small hit type, so that a V prize is generated during the small hit game. Based on the above, the ratio of the jackpot type determined to be the jackpot D and the proportion determined to the jackpot E are equal (the percentage of the jackpot type determined by the V prize in the set value 2: jackpot E = jackpot D). Further, when the set value is 3, the small hit A is determined at a higher rate than the small hit B as the small hit type, and the V prize is generated during the small hit game. The rate at which the jackpot type is determined as the jackpot D is higher than the rate at which the jackpot E is determined (the percentage of the jackpot type determined by the V prize at the set value 1: jackpot D> jackpot E).

As described above, in this embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot and the determination ratio of the jackpot type when a V prize occurs are different according to the set value. That is, the type of the small hit game state controlled according to the set value may change, and the type of the big hit game state controlled when the V prize occurs may change. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Depending on the set value, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B. That is, if the determination ratio of the small hit type differs depending on the set value, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit. It also includes determining the type at a rate of 100%. Further, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. When the small hit type is determined at different ratios according to the variable special map, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B, depending on the variable special map. That is, in order to determine the small hit type at different ratios according to the fluctuation special chart, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit type is determined. It also includes determining at a rate of 100%. At least one of the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined by using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The determination ratio of the big hit type and the small hit type is not limited to different depending on the set value, and the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined by the same determination ratio for all the set values.

The game playability itself is not limited to the one that does not change regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the game playability may change according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the jackpot game ends based on the game ball passing through the third count switch during the jackpot game. While controlling the later gaming state to the probabilistic state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a different game property (so-called V probabilistic type) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the third count switch during the big hit game according to the fluctuation special figure. When the set value set to is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the pachinko ball passes through the third count switch during high base (during time reduction control). Based on this, the game property (so-called 1-type / 2-type mixed type) that controls the jackpot gaming state may be used. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided. When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 or 4, the third count switch is used as an effect switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the third count switch). When the set value is 2 or 3, the third count switch is used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability change state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the third count switch). You may use it.

The ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. The variation pattern determination table is used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the result of prior determination. As the fluctuation pattern judgment table, it is determined in advance that the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is decided in advance that the fluctuation display result is "big hit" and the fluctuation display result is "small hit". A variation pattern determination table for jackpots used at the time of occurrence and a variation pattern determination table for deviation used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is "out of place" are prepared in advance.

FIG. 21-9 is an explanatory diagram showing a large hit variation pattern determination table and a small hit variation pattern determination table. The jackpot variation pattern determination table is referred to for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination when it is determined that the variation display result is the jackpot symbol. The variation pattern determination table for small hits is referred to for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern when it is determined that the variation display result is to be a small hit symbol.

FIG. 21-9 (A) shows a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A). The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A) is referred to when the jackpot type is jackpot A. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) is from 0 to 300 in the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3. ), And 301 to 800 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 801 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). ing. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 351 to 825 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 826 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 401 to 850 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

FIG. 21-9 (B) shows a fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and C). The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) is referred to when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot is from 0 to 100 in the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 (for jackpot B and jackpot C). It is assigned to PB1-1), 101-350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). Is assigned to. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 150 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 151 to 450 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 451 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 201 to 550 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

The fluctuation pattern judgment table for jackpot (for jackpot A) and the fluctuation pattern judgment table for jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C) include the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-). 2) For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value. When the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) is higher than the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). Moreover, the set values are lowered in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. In this embodiment, the super reach β is easily determined when the jackpot type is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, and the super reach α is determined when the jackpot type is “big hit A”. By assigning the judgment value so that it is easy to be performed, the player's expectation that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β will be "big hit B" or "big hit C" is raised. Can be done.

FIG. 21-9 (C) shows a variation pattern determination table for small hits. In the small hit variation pattern judgment table, regardless of whether the set value is "1", "2", or "3", 0 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value range 0 to 997 is a small hit. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PC1-1) of. In the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Has been done. Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in this implementation, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. With the set values "1", "2", and "3", the fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios.

FIG. 21-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for detachment. The deviation pattern determination table is referred to for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern when it is determined that the variation display symbol is to be the detached symbol.

FIG. 21-10 (A) shows the deviation pattern determination table A. The deviation pattern determination table A is referred to when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control. In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

FIG. 21-10 (B) shows the deviation pattern determination table B. The deviation pattern determination table B is referred to when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the low base state. In the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4 are displayed. A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2) and the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β is assigned as the determination value. There is.

FIG. 21-10 (C) shows the deviation pattern determination table C. The deviation pattern determination table C is referred to when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. In the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 5 to 8 are shown. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the deviation pattern (PA2-2) and the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β. There is.

FIG. 21-10 (D) shows the deviation pattern determination table D. The deviation pattern determination table D is referred to when the gaming state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed. In the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2) corresponding to the time reduction control are shown. -2), A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach variation pattern, and is lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. It is supposed to be. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variation display result is out of alignment, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a common decision rate regardless of the set value, so the super reach variation pattern It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

The "common decision rate" is one in which the decision rate is completely the same with different set values (this embodiment) and one in which the decision rate is the same with different set values (for example, the set value). The determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach differs by about 1% between 1 and the set value 3). If the variation display result is out of order, it is not limited to the form in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value, and if the variation display result is out of order, Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and only the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of any of non-reach and normal reach may be the same. It may be the same. If the fluctuation display result is out of order, the set value is set so that both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach α and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β are set regardless of the set value. Regardless of the form, it is not limited to the same form, and if the variation display result is out of alignment, only one of the determination rate of the variation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β is available. The determination ratio of may be the same regardless of the set value. If the fluctuation display result is out of order, the set value is set so that both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach α and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β are set regardless of the set value. Regardless of the form, it is not limited to the same form, and even when the variation display result is a jackpot, the setting value in which the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot is set regardless of the set value. It may be the same regardless of. If the variation display result is out of alignment, it is not limited to the form in which the determination rate of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach differs depending on the set value, and it is not limited to the set value. Of the reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns. If the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or a specific variation pattern is set to 100%. It is also included to decide with. It is not limited to the form in which the fluctuation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination table that differs according to the total number of reserved storages, and the number of reserved storages in the special symbol to be changed (for example, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol). The variation pattern is changed using the deviation pattern determination table, which differs according to the number of reserved memory of the first special symbol when executing, and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when executing the variation display of the second special symbol. May be determined.

In each deviation pattern determination table, regardless of the numerical value of 1 to 3 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the fluctuation pattern of super reach deviation (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is set. The range of assigned random numbers is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (super reach loss). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the variation display is not limited to a form in which the ratio of the variation display executed in the variation pattern out of super reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability for each set value are not limited. In consideration of the probability of loss, the variation display may be executed at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the variation pattern of the super reach deviation.

FIG. 21-11 shows the game control data holding area 150. The game control data holding area 150 is provided in the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, and serves as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 150 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control timer setting unit. It includes 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A stores the hold data related to the variable display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the first starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the first starting condition by passing (entering) the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the fluctuation display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are set as pending data. , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The first starting condition is established when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning is generated. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held without being started yet, and the variation display result in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit based on (special figure display result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores the hold data related to the variable display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition by the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the fluctuation display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are set as pending data. , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The second starting condition is established when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting winning is generated. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure has not been started yet and is held, and the variation display result in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit based on (special figure display result).

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order in which it has passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers. The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software. The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, and are stored as random count values according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The totalization of game balls and the display of the accessory ratio and the like on the main board 11 of this embodiment will be described. On the main board 11, information regarding the winning of the game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting winning opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the first large The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning in the winning opening and the second major winning opening (attacker) are input, the number of launched balls is totaled, and the display monitor 29 displays the first large winning opening and the total number of winning balls. The ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second major winning opening (attacker), and the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) out of the total number of prize balls The role ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls from winning the 1st and 2nd prizes (attacker), and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. Is to be displayed. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive winning balls below) by winning the first prize opening and the second prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the number of prize balls by winning the 2nd starting prize opening (Denchu) and the number of prize balls by winning the 1st big winning opening and the 2nd big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls ( This is the ratio of the number of balls acquired for the following characters). The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is based on the number of prize balls by winning the 1st prize opening and the 2nd prize opening (attacker) and the winning of the 2nd starting prize opening (Denchu). The number of prize balls and the prize balls by winning the prizes (first start prize, general prize) other than the first prize, the second prize (attacker), and the second start prize (electric chew). It is the sum of numbers and. The first large winning opening, the second large winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable accessories, and the game ball can be won by changing the passable width of the game ball. It is a character whose assumed ratio fluctuates. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first major winning opening, the second major winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed characters, and the game The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the expected winning ratio of the game ball is a fixed value.

As for the aggregation and calculation method of the information on the winning of the game, the consecutive ratio and the winning ratio are the winning balls by winning the first starting winning opening (Heso) and the general winning opening (Sode) in the number of 6000 prize balls. Number (number of general prize balls), number of ordinary electric role prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), which is the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize opening (electric chew), first large prize opening and second large prize The number of special electric service prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls for winning a prize in the mouth (attacker), is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric role prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), and the special electric power The number of prize balls (number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. ing. That is, a considerable amount (for example, several bytes) of 6000 pieces of 11 sets are stored, and the cumulative ratio (%) and combination ratio (%) of them can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls launched for the number of prize balls of 60,000 is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of game balls launched is calculated.

The display monitor 29 is a base calculated based on the 6000 consecutive ratios (%), the winning combination (%), the cumulative continuous ratio (%), the winning combination (%), and the previous 60000 prize balls ( The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls by winning, the number of prize balls by winning the first prize opening and the second prize opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the continuous ratio (%) of 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning ratio (%) of 60,000 pieces displayed thereafter, it is equivalent to 6000 pieces. There is a risk that there will be a discrepancy between the joint ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (Heso), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu), the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) If the number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning are input and totaled at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, the display timing of the ratio (%) of 6000 pieces), such a discrepancy Can be prevented.

A storage area for storing information regarding the winning of the game in this embodiment is provided for each set value, and is provided for each set value, such as a general winning ball, a first starting mouth prize ball, an ordinary electric service award ball, and a special electric service award. The balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in the storage area (ring buffer) according to the set value. Therefore, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base of this embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening (Denchu) and the first and second major winning openings (attackers) The calculation method of the bonus ratio (combined ratio (%)) when the number of winning balls, which is the total number of prize balls by winning the prize, is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls means the total total number of gaming media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of balls acquired as a character means the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of consecutive winning balls is the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the game medium to the attacker. The total number of hits is the cumulative number of game media that have been hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the combination ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

Ream ratio = [Number of consecutive characters acquired / Total number of acquired characters] x 100 ... (1)

Role ratio = [(Number of consecutive winning balls + Number of winning balls) / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 ... (2)

Base = [60,000 (total number of prize balls) / total number of hits] x 100 ... (3)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the prize ratio is calculated as 0.70 (rounded down to the nearest three digits) by dividing 42000 by 60,000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the calculation by the following method is required.

First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by multiplying the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be multiplied by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then divide 42000 by this 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be divided by 1000.

In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the accessory ratio for a long period of time. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in the storage area of 3 bytes. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of winning balls. The microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform calculations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the operation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

A third calculation method obtained by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded down to the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h so that the calculation by the microcomputer used for the pachinko game machine 1 becomes easy, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower 1-byte 10h is rounded down to the number of winning balls of 00A410h, and the number of winning balls of bonus is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation. Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, by dividing 156 by this 2, 78 is obtained as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%. In the third calculation method, the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, if the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are both 10 times, the error will be + 1%. That is, the error is reduced by lengthening the period for calculating the accessory ratio, and is approximated to the original value.

In the calculation of the winning combination (%), for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 is divided as a divisor from 19876 to calculate the ratio. 1976/34321 = 0.57912 ..., And it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When performing calculations on the game control microcomputer 100, it is necessary to avoid calculation with a decimal point, so the calculation formula is replaced with the following formula. In the division of 1976/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, the decimal point is rounded down, and 1976/343 = 57.9475 ... Since the part after the decimal point is rounded down, it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. Will be missing.

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 except for the value of the most significant bit), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when it is replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point rounded down, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display value is 69% → 70%. It is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, but even on the display of an error of 1%, the combination ratio (%) (or the connection ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

Further, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. Therefore, the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) may not be displayed on the display monitor until the total number of acquired balls (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specific number or more is totaled by the counter. , Even if the display is performed, it may be notified that the error may be large by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

The storage area in which the information regarding the winning of the game is stored may be continuously stored without being initialized when the clear switch AK001 or the like is operated. This storage area may constitute a 10-set total buffer, a total number of prize balls buffer, or the like, which is a total of information on winning a game stored in a ring buffer including a ring buffer and having 10 counters having a maximum of 2 bytes. .. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and if an abnormality is detected, it is initialized, or the value of the number of winning balls is larger than the value of the total number of stored prize balls, or the character is Initialization of the storage area where information related to winning a game is stored when an event that cannot occur in a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive winning balls is larger than the value of the number of acquired balls. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization process, an error display or a warning display may be performed, or an initialization process may be performed after the error display or the warning display is performed.

When a failure occurs in the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio, or when the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio has to be redone, the display monitor clear switch different from the clear switch AK001 is operated. By doing so, the data used for the connection ratio and the combination ratio stored in the non-volatile storage device such as the RAM 102 or the flash memory may be cleared. The display monitor clear switch may be arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 at a position such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17 that cannot be easily operated by a staff member of the game hall or the like. When the display monitor clear switch is operated, a display monitor clear signal different from the clear signal is transmitted to the main board 11.

The substrate case 201 is made of a translucent material so that the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 can be visually recognized. The board case 201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of an electric component of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiating hole is not directly in front of the main board 11. Therefore, the heat dissipation holes do not block the visibility of the display monitor 29. In addition, the "direct front" here means a direct front with the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between a staff member or the like of a game hall who wants to visually recognize the main board 11 and the main board 11.

The display monitor 29 displays the combination ratio (%), the connection ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and each value is switched and displayed every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To do. In this case, for example, while the combination ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium is awarded to the electric chew or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is continuously compared after 5 seconds ( If it is displayed as a value of%), there is a risk that the value of the combination ratio (%) and the value of the consecutive combination (%) will deviate. Therefore, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed. When the numerical value that can be displayed on the 7-segment is double-digit (for example, when two 7-segments are provided), 100% is set as 100 and the display cannot be performed. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. The display monitor 29 can display a numerical value in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under certain conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits. It should be noted that the attacker is not limited to a form in which the sensors provided in each of the attacker and the electric chew detect that the game medium has won a prize, and the number of each prize ball is individually totaled based on the detection result. The number of winning balls and the number of continuous winning balls are based on the detection result using the sensor provided after the discharge passages from which the winning game medium and the winning game medium are discharged are merged. May be aggregated.

The main board 11 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2. On the back surface side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, each peripheral board such as the effect control board 12 is also provided. The RAM 102 in the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth. A general prize counter and a large prize counter are provided. It should be noted that the number of winnings of the 1st big winning opening and the 2nd big winning opening (attacker) is not limited to the form of totaling by the large winning number counter, and the number of winnings to these 1st big winning opening is totaled. A counter for the number of first prizes and a counter for the number of prizes for the second prize, which totals the number of prizes for the second prize, are separately provided, and the number of prizes for the first prize and the number of prizes for the second prize are set separately. The number of winnings may be totaled individually, and the total number of each of these winnings may be used as the number of winnings to the attacker.

The gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 26A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 26B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 26C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 26D. The large prize number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A.

FIG. 21-12 shows the arrangement and display contents of the display monitor 29. The main board 11 is housed in the board case 201. A caulking pin 11B is attached to the board case 201. By providing the caulking pin 11B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 201, and fraudulent acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The substrate case 201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter, also referred to as a “crimped substrate case”). The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing sticker 11S is attached to the substrate case 201 to prove that the main substrate 11 is enclosed. The sealing sticker 11S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 201. The sealing sticker 11S is arranged at a position away from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 29. As described above, the display monitor 29 is arranged at a position not hidden by the sealing sticker 11S.

As shown in FIG. 21-12 (A), the display monitor 29 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, a fourth display unit 29D, and a fifth display unit 29E. .. The first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. These first display units 29A to fifth display units 29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

As shown in FIG. 21-12 (B), each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 29. The aggregated set values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first display unit 29A of the first digit, and the aggregation period is displayed on the second display unit 29B of the second digit and the third display unit 29C of the third digit. Then, the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the 4th display unit 29D of the 4th digit and the 5th display unit 29E of the 5th digit. The display No. 1 displays the short-term continuous ratio, and the display No. 2 displays the short-term combination ratio. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done. The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for obtaining the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset. In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C display "y6." "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. "A7." Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E, and the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "B6." Is displayed on 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display).

In calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, the main board 11 has a first large winning opening, a second large winning opening (attacker), a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a first general winning opening. The number of game balls that have entered the 4th general winning opening and the number of game balls that have been discharged from the discharge port are totaled. In the main process, the CPU 103 includes a gate switch 21, a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a first count switch 23, a second count switch 24A, and a first general winning opening switch 26A to a fourth general. Switch processing is performed to confirm the status (presence / absence of detection signal) of each switch of the winning port switch 26D and the discharging port switch 70. In the switch processing, it is specified which approach area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passing number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the detection signal is output. The values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch 26A When a detection signal is output from the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, and the second The values of the 3 general winning number counter and the 4th general winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 70, the value of the driving number counter is added to enter each approach area. The number of game balls entering (the number of game balls winning into each winning opening) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102. In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each approach area is executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each approach area (switch state confirmation process). By including it in the switch processing), the number of game balls entering each entry area can be counted without executing a separate counting program, that is, without causing the problem of capacity shortage due to the increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

FIG. 21-13 shows a storage area for storing the number of prize balls to each winning opening. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of winning balls by winning each winning opening based on the total number of winning balls to each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let me. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize for the winning opening by the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening. The number of prize balls for each winning opening to be classified is the general winning opening prize ball (the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening (sode) winning ball), the first starting winning opening winning ball (the first). 1 With the number of prize balls of the starting prize ball (prize ball by winning the starting prize), the ordinary electric role prize ball (the prize ball by winning the electric chew), and the special electric role prize ball (the prize ball by winning the attacker) is there. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls hit. In the CPU 103, the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first start winning opening are individually totaled, but the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the first start are calculated individually. The number of game ball winnings to the winning opening may be aggregated. In addition, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning opening prize ball are calculated separately, but the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the first starting winning opening The number of prize balls may be calculated together with the number of prize balls.

The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of shots. The ring buffer includes ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas including a counter of a maximum of 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer includes a 0th storage area including a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. The number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases as the game progresses, is added to the 0th storage area. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin. Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area of the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total cumulative total for each winning opening. There is. The total storage area for 10 sets and the total storage area are composed of a counter of up to 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60,000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

The RAM 102 stores a ratio combination storage area for storing 10 sets and the total cumulative combination ratio and ratio, a base for 10 sets (base 2), and a base for the previous 10 sets (base 1). A base storage area is provided. In the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the winning ratios and consecutive ratios for 10 sets and the total cumulative total are calculated based on the number of prize balls based on the number of winning games for each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total, and for 10 sets. And the total cumulative combination ratio and connection ratio are stored in the connection ratio combination storage area. The ratio-combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the combination ratio for 10 sets and the total cumulative total is composed of a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. The winning ratios and linkage ratios for 10 sets and the total cumulative total can be stored with a margin at a counter of up to 1 byte, for example, when storing them as integers. In the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the base for 10 sets is calculated based on the number of hits for the number of winnings of the game ball into each winning opening for 10 sets, and the calculated base for 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time. The base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits for the number of winnings of the game ball into each winning opening for 10 sets of the above is stored in the base storage area. When the base 1 and the base 2 are stored as integers, for example, they can be stored with a margin by a counter having a maximum of 1 byte.

FIG. 21-14 shows a memory map of the CPU 103 on the main board 11. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the built-in register, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. The address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is assigned to the internal ROM area which is the ROM area of the memory space (in this embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH; 2FC0H to 2FFFH is the program management area), and the CPU 103 is assigned to the internal ROM area. Data is read from ROM 101 by designating this ROM area. Further, in this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H. The address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the built-in register area (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register or goes to the register via this built-in register area. Write the data of. The address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to the built-in RAM area which is the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 specifies this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102. Data is written to the RAM 102. The other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH in this embodiment) are regarded as unused areas.

FIG. 21-15 shows an RWM area that serves as a built-in RAM area. The built-in RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 is composed of a RAM control area, an unused area, a RAM data area, and other areas. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area is composed of instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operator) required for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. Data for the control program to be used (sometimes referred to simply as control program data) is temporarily stored. Reference data (for example, various lottery data) referred to by the control program is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area.

The data used for displaying the connection ratio and the combination ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area or the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area is provided with a storage area for storing the total total number of prize balls for each winning opening and a continuous ratio storage area for the total total. The storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas include an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having 1st to 10th storage areas, and the number of winning balls for each winning opening (10 sets). ) Is provided, and a storage area for 10 sets is provided. Data having different starting addresses of subroutines are stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address in the built-in RAM area, and each data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data, management data) stores 1 byte. When the data exceeds the number of bytes (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. ..

FIG. 21-16 shows an example of display control on the display monitor 29. The main board 11 controls the display monitor 29 to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. On the display monitor 29, a plurality of items are sequentially displayed.

FIG. 21-16 (A) is a time chart showing an mode of display change on the display monitor 29. When the display on the display monitor 29 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative winning combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed. The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. Then, when the display of the display No. 6 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. After that, from the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the base 2 of display No. 6, each display is sequentially changed and displayed every 5 seconds. As for the display color, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 29 switches between the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds for display.

FIG. 21-16 (B1) shows a case where the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "y" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 21-16 (B2) shows a case where the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "y" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 21-16 (B3) shows a case where the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "A" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 21-16 (B4) shows a case where the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "A" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 29D and the 5th display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 21-16 (B5) shows a case where the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "b" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "L." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

FIG. 21-16 (B6) shows a case where the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "b" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

The display of the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 can be sequentially changed for each set value based on the operation of the display changeover switch 30. There is. For example, when the set value is "1" and the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed, the display changeover switch 30 is operated. As a result, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "2", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, and total cumulative ratio displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, The display of the total cumulative winning combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "2". When the set value is "2" and the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed, the display changeover switch 30 is operated. The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "3", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative total displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "3". When the set value is "3", the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed, and by operating the display changeover switch 30. The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "1", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative total displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "1".

In the display monitor 29, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in each set value are not limited to the displayable form, and only one numerical value among these connection ratios, combination ratios, and bases, or Only the numerical value of any 2 may be displayed. The connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are not limited to the form of being displayed on the display monitor 29. The history of the number of prize balls given may be displayed on the display monitor 29 without calculating the winning ratio and the base. On the display monitor 29, only the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the base 1 and the base 2 are not limited to those displayed in green, and are not limited to the short-term consecutive ratio. The short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio and total cumulative role ratio are displayed in the same color, and base 1 and base 2 are the same as the short-term combination ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, and total cumulative role ratio. It may be displayed in color.

FIG. 21-17 shows an example of executing an update in the active buffer and the ring buffer. In the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage area of the total sum and the total total of 10 sets and the storage area of the continuous ratio combination storage area for storing the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the 10 sets and the total total are updated, respectively. At this time, the numerical values stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer are moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, and the numerical values stored in the 1st to 9th storage areas of the ring buffer are each second. Move to the storage area to the tenth storage area. For example, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", and "45", respectively. It is "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 100 millionth area to the 10th storage area is changed to "27", "81", and "120", respectively. "36" "225" "87" "66" "117" "45" "21" is updated. Along with this, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to "0", and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased. When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be erased once and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

(Explanation of game control regarding other feature parts)
FIG. 21-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the main process executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 in this embodiment. It suffices if this main process can be executed in place of the game control main process. In the main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step Sa1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step Sa2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step Sa3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), etc.) (step Sa4), the RAM 102 can be accessed. (Step Sa5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the clear switch AK001 is ON based on the clear signal which is the output signal of the clear switch AK001 (step Sa6). If the clear switch AK001 is off, it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process has been executed (step Sa7). When the power failure detection process is executed, it is determined whether or not the execution result of the parity check is normal (step Sa8). If the check result is normal, the start address of the backup setting table is set in the pointer (step Sa41), and the initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa42). As a result, the stored contents at the time of power failure regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are restored.

When the power failure is restored in step Sa42, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal which is the output signal of the lock switch 51 (step AKS001). When the lock switch 51 is turned on in step AKS001, the set value can be confirmed by executing the setting confirmation process (step AKS002). In the setting confirmation process, it is possible to confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. After the lock switch AK002 is turned off in step AKS001 or the setting confirmation process is executed in step AKS002, the process proceeds to step Sa14. When the lock switch AK002 is turned off in step AKS001, the command 9200H, which is a power failure recovery designation command, may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 182.

When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started in step AKS002, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting confirmation is started from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The command 9400H, which is a command, is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, and the normal The symbol display 20 may be controlled so that the missed symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stop state different from the missed symbol is performed. When the execution of the setting confirmation process in step AKS001 is completed, the setting confirmation state and the game stop state associated therewith are ended, and the command 9401H, which is a setting confirmation end command, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Will be done.

If the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6, the power failure detection process is not executed in step Sa7, or the check result is not normal in step Sa8, the predetermined RAM is cleared. The process is executed to clear the data other than the set values stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 102 (step Sa9). The storage area in which the information regarding the winning of the game is stored may not be cleared in step Sa9. Following step Sa9, the start address of the initialization setting table is set in the pointer (step Sa10), and the initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa11). As a result, the stored contents regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are initialized. When the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) by steps Sa9 and Sa10, so that the clear switch AK001 detects the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001. , The operation related to the initialization of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be detected.

When the stored contents are initialized in step Sa11, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal (step Sa12). When the lock switch 51 is turned on in step Sa12, the set value can be changed by executing the setting change process (step Sa13). In the setting change process, it is possible to confirm the change status of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. After the lock switch 51 is turned off in step Sa12 or the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, the process proceeds to step Sa14.

When the lock switch 51 is turned off in step Sa12, the command 9000H, which is a RAM clear notification command, may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The setting change process is not limited to the mode in which the setting change process is executed on the condition that the lock switch 51 is on, and the setting change process is executed on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is open. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed.

When the execution of the setting change process is started in step Sa13, the setting change state is set as the change permission state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 Then, the command 9100H, which is the setting change start command, is transmitted. When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the execution of the setting change process in step Sa13 is completed, the setting change state and the game stop state associated therewith are ended, and the command 93XXH, which is a setting change end command, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Will be done. In addition to the case where the clear switch AK001 is on, it is set if the lock switch 51 is on when the power failure inspection process is not executed or when the execution result of the parity check is not normal. The mode is not limited to executing the change process, and the setting change process may be executed if the lock switch 51 is on only when the RAM 102 is cleared when the clear switch AK001 is on.

After that, the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is read out (step Sa14), and the set value is used as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the random number circuit 104 is initially set by the random number circuit setting process (step Sa15). In addition, a setting is made to generate a periodic timer interrupt every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step Sa16). Then, the interrupt prohibition setting (step Sa17), the display random number update process (step Sa18), the initial value random number update process (step Sa19), and the interrupt permission setting (step Sa20) are repeatedly executed.

When the special symbol normal process is executed in the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 is based on a display result determination table according to a set value and numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining a variable display result. Whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, when the fluctuation pattern setting process is executed, any of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be selected by using the fluctuation pattern judgment table according to the set value and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern judgment. You just have to decide. In this way, the game can be advanced so that the advantage for the player is different by determining the variable display result at different ratios according to the set value.

In this embodiment, when the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6 of the main process, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 to Sa11, and then in steps Sa12 and Sa13. The set value can be changed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stored contents of the RAM 102 may be initialized (cleared) after the state in which the set value can be changed ends. .. That is, when the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, it is determined in step Sa12 whether or not the lock switch 51 is on, and if it is off, the process proceeds to steps Sa9 to Sa11, so that the RAM 102 When the stored contents are initialized (cleared) and the lock switch 51 is turned on in step Sa12, the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, and after the process is completed, steps Sa9 to You may proceed to Sa11. For example, when the RAM clear notification command is transmitted in response to the initialization (clearing) of the stored contents of the RAM 102, the initialization notification is started in accordance with the reception of the RAM clear notification command on the effect control board 12. There are times. Therefore, if steps Sa9 to Sa11 are executed before step Sa13, the initialization notification is executed and the setting is made when the setting change process is executed in step Sa13 and the set value can be changed. There is a risk that the work of changing the value will be hindered. On the other hand, after the setting change process of step Sa13 is completed, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) by steps Sa9 to Sa11, so that the initialization notification and the like are started after the change of the set value is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

FIG. 21-19 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting change process of step Sa13. As shown in FIG. 21-19 (A), the power switch AK002 is operated by a staff member of the amusement park when the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc. are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the power is supplied by shutting off the power. When stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends, as shown in FIG. 21-19 (B). After that, when a staff member of the amusement park or the like presses the clear switch AK001 and operates the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 on, the power supply is started by turning on the power. As shown in -19 (C), the display monitor 29 displays the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 in the first display unit 29A. When the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by a staff member of the game hall or the like while this set value is displayed, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is sequentially updated each time the operation is detected. And display. For example, when the pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, if "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, it is updated to "2", and if "2" is displayed, it is changed to "3". It suffices if the display of the first display unit 29A can be sequentially and sequentially updated between "1" and "3" by updating and updating to "1" if "3" is displayed. After that, when the lock switch 51 is pushed in by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the operation is detected and the set value displayed on the first display unit 29A is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (update storage). To do. At this time, by blinking the first display unit 29A, a staff member of the amusement park or the like can recognize that a new set value has been stored.

When the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9. Therefore, when the set value is changed, the hold storage based on the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is deleted. When a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting change process is terminated because the operation is detected. The CPU 103 is in a state where the game can be played by executing the processes after step Sa14 in the main process. As a result, for example, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the variable pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed. The setting change process is not limited to displaying the stored value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 29. For example, the setting value most advantageous for the player. A predetermined setting value such as "1" or "3", which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player, may be displayed.

In the setting change process, the control of sequentially updating and displaying the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29 is limited to the form of updating each time the pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. For example, each time a pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 is detected, the display may be sequentially updated and displayed. For example, in the display monitor 29, when the clear switch AK001 is pressed while the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the first display unit 29A displays "1". If "" is displayed, it is updated to "2", if "2" is displayed, it is updated to "3", and if "3" is displayed, it is updated to "1". It suffices if the display of the display unit 29A can be sequentially and sequentially updated between "1" and "3". In this case, the clear switch AK001 used for initializing the stored contents of the RAM 102 can be commonly used for changing the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 21-20 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting confirmation process of step AKS002. As shown in FIG. 21-20 (A), the power switch AK002 is operated by a staff member of the amusement park when the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc. are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the power is supplied by shutting off the power. When stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends, as shown in FIG. 21-20 (B). After that, the power supply is started by turning on the power by operating the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 on without pressing the clear switch AK001 by a staff member of the amusement park. As shown in 21-20 (C), on the display monitor 29, the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A. In the state where this set value is displayed, even if the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A cannot be updated and displayed. After that, when a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the operation is detected and the setting confirmation process is terminated. The CPU 103 is in a state where the game can be played by executing the processes after step Sa14 in the main process. As a result, for example, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the variable pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

In this way, the display monitor 29 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can display information on the game value that enables confirmation of adjustment of the number of prize balls after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The display monitor 29 can display information on set values for advancing the game so that the advantage for the player is different by changing the probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a display device for displaying the set value separately from the display device for displaying the information on the game value, it is possible to prevent an increase in the manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration in the pachinko gaming machine 1. it can.

In this embodiment, the display monitor 29 is used to display the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, the base, and the like. The display monitor 29 is used to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc., while the setting display unit different from the display monitor 29 is used to display the set value. May be good. As a result, the control for displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc. using the display monitor 29 and the control for displaying the set value using the setting display unit can be clearly separated. The processing by the control program or the like can be distributed and simplified, and the control load can be reduced. In this way, when a setting display unit different from the display monitor 29 is used, the setting display unit may be arranged on a board different from the board on which the display monitor 29 is arranged, or the display monitor 29 may be arranged. The setting display unit may be arranged on a board common to the board.

(Explanation of modified examples related to the configuration and game control in other feature parts)
FIG. 21-21 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in a modified example in which the setting change process can be executed during the game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, and the change of the set value may be executed during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the gaming machine frame 3 is opened by a staff member of the game hall, and the clear switch AK001 is performed together with the switching operation of turning on the lock switch 51. When the pressing operation of turning on is performed, those operations are detected, so that the display monitor 29 displays the set value set in the current pachinko gaming machine 1 on the first display unit 29A. When the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed by a staff member of the game hall or the like while this set value is displayed, it is displayed on the first display unit 29A every time the operation is detected. Numerical values are updated and displayed sequentially. Then, when the lock switch 51 is pushed in by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the operation is detected, and the set value displayed on the first display unit 29A is used as a new set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , Stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on and the detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on. It may be possible to change the power at the time of turning on the power, at least based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. For example, even if there is no detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are not initialized (cleared) based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed based on the detection of an operation of restoring the stored contents at the time of a power failure and then pressing the clear switch AK001 on. In this way, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not initialized by initializing (clearing) the stored contents of the RAM 102 with the start of power supply by turning on the power, the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time of turning on the power Control may be performed to change the set value.

When a new set value is stored, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the special figure holding memory, the normal figure holding storage, the game control flag setting unit 152, the game control timer setting unit 153, and the game control counter are stored. Various flags and data stored in the setting unit 154, the game control buffer setting unit 155, and the like may be deleted. In this way, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, a new hold memory in which the variable display result becomes a big hit is generated as the set value is changed, and a new normal variable winning ball device 6B is generated. Can be prevented from being released (a hit on a normal figure occurs) and an unreasonably large hit on the variable display result during execution. Further, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the big winning opening is closed during the big hit game, and the normal variable winning ball device 6B is closed when the normal variable winning ball device 6B is open. This can prevent the player from gaining inappropriate profits. Further, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new setting value, it is possible to prevent the hold memory from being deleted even though the new setting value is not set. It should be noted that the setting value is not limited to the form of clearing the hold memory based on the setting of a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting value originally set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reset. In some cases, the hold memory may be cleared. The hold storage may be cleared at the timing when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 29, that is, when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 103. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from being accurately reflected in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The pachinko game machine 1 is not limited to the form in which the first prize opening and the second prize opening are closed based on the new set value set for the pachinko game machine 1, and the display monitor 29 is used for the pachinko game machine 1. The first prize opening and the second prize opening may be closed at the timing when the set setting value is displayed, that is, when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 103. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from being accurately reflected in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 21-22 shows a display mode in a modified example in which the display monitor 29 is not provided with the first display unit 29A capable of displaying the set value. The display monitor 29 is provided with five display units from the first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E, and the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base displayed by the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E. The setting value is not limited to the form of being displayed on the first display unit 29A, and it is not necessary to provide a display unit for displaying the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base setting value being displayed. In FIG. 21-22 (A), the display unit corresponding to the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E of the display monitor 29 displays the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and corresponds to the first display unit 29A. The set value is not displayed by the display unit.

FIG. 21-22 (B) shows an example of display control of the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base when the display unit for displaying the set value is not provided. In this case, the ratio, combination ratio, and base at the set value 1 are red, the ratio, combination ratio, and base at the setting value 2 are green, and the ratio, combination ratio, and base at the setting value 3 are blue. To display. By displaying the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base with different display colors according to the set value, it is possible to easily grasp which set value is the numerical value. In this display control example as well, as in the above embodiment, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the set value 1 can be switched and displayed every 5 seconds, and the set value 1 is set for each operation of the display changeover switch 30. The switching display of the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at 5-second intervals is changed to the switching display of the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the setting value 2 at 5-second intervals, and further, the connection ratio and the combination ratio at the setting value 3 are changed. , It suffices if it can be cyclically changed to the switching display of the base at 5-second intervals. Alternatively, the switching display of the connection ratio at the set value 1, the connection ratio at the set value 2, and the connection ratio at the set value 3 at 5-second intervals, the combination ratio at the set value 1, the combination ratio at the set value 2, and the combination value 3 The switching display of the role ratio at 5-second intervals, the base at the set value 1, the base at the set value 2, and the switching display at the base at the set value 3 at 5-second intervals are cyclically displayed for each operation of the display changeover switch 30. Changes may be possible.

The display monitor 29 is not limited to a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base for each set value can be displayed, and the connection ratio and the combination according to the set value of any one of the set value 1 to the set value 3. Only the ratio and the base may be displayed. For example, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated for each of the set values 1 to 3, and the highest or lowest value or the longest or shortest measurement time among the calculated comparison ratio, combination ratio, and base is calculated. Only the values and the like need to be displayed on the display monitor 29. Further, among the calculated ratios, combination ratios, and bases, the highest or lowest value and the longest or shortest measurement time value are set as the initial display on the display monitor 29, and the initial display is changed by operating the display changeover switch 30. The display of the display monitor 29 may be switchable to the value of.

The display monitor 29 has two or more of the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the set value 1, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the set value 2, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the set value 3. It is possible to calculate the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base in the set values, and in addition to or in place of the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base for each setting value, the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base in these two or more setting values can be calculated. It may be possible to display on the display monitor 29. In this way, by making it possible to display the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the set values of two or more on the display monitor 29, it is possible to grasp the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in more detail. It should be noted that the composite information is not limited to a form in which the combined ratio, combination ratio, and base of two or more set values can be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29, and the continuous ratio at two or more set values is not limited. , The combination ratio, and the average value of the base may be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29.

The display monitor 29 may be able to display only the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base according to the set set value. Further, in the display monitor 29, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base according to the set set value are displayed as the initial display, and the initial display is changed to another set value according to the operation of the display changeover switch 30. You may switch to the display of the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. The display monitor 29 may be able to display numerical values other than the continuous ratio, the winning ratio, and the base, such as the number of prize balls per predetermined time (for example, 1 hour), as predetermined information according to the set value.

For example, under specific conditions such as immediately after the end of a big hit game or during a time saving state, by using a special fluctuation pattern judgment table different from the fluctuation pattern judgment table in the normal time, the fluctuation display with a specific fluctuation pattern than in the normal time ( For example, the shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-4)) may be facilitated. When it is possible to determine the variation pattern using the special variation pattern determination table, the determination of the variation pattern using the special variation pattern determination table is completed and switched to the normal determination according to the set value. The timing may be different. Specifically, when the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the special fluctuation pattern determination table up to the 15th fluctuation display after the jackpot game ends, and 16 after the jackpot game ends. From the second time onward, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern judgment table at the normal time, and if the set value is 2, the special fluctuation pattern judgment table up to the 10th fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game. The fluctuation pattern is determined using, and after the 11th time after the jackpot game is completed, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table at the normal time, and if the set value is 3, the jackpot game is played. If the fluctuation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern judgment table up to the 5th variation display after the end, and after the 6th time after the end of the big hit game, the variation pattern can be determined using the normal variation pattern determination table. Good.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed in step Sa9 in the main process, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a special fluctuation pattern is used in the first 10 fluctuations. When the variable display is executed, it is suggested that a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, setting value 1) is set, and after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the pachinko game machine is executed. When the fluctuation display is executed with a special fluctuation pattern at the 30th fluctuation after the setting value set to 1 is changed, a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, setting value 1) is set. It may be a game property in which attention is paid to whether or not the fluctuation display is executed in a special fluctuation pattern at a specific timing or a specific number of fluctuation displays, such as when it is confirmed that the player is present. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has such a game property, when the set setting value is 1, the RAM 102 is initialized (cleared) or set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. After the set value is changed, the rate at which fluctuations are executed in a special fluctuation pattern is the highest in the first 10 fluctuations, and when the set setting value is 3, the RAM 102 is initialized ( Clear) is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the rate at which fluctuations are executed in a special fluctuation pattern at the first 10 fluctuations is the lowest. Only when the set value is 1, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the first time. The fluctuation may be executed in a special fluctuation pattern at the 30th fluctuation.

The switching condition (the number of fluctuations until the table is switched) for switching the fluctuation pattern judgment table for determining the fluctuation pattern from the special fluctuation pattern judgment table to the normal fluctuation pattern judgment table differs depending on the set value. It may be determined by a ratio. The determination rate of a specific variation pattern (for example, shortened non-reach (PA1-4)) decreases due to different switching conditions for switching the variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern according to the set value. Since the player can be focused on the timing, the effect of the fluctuation pattern can be enhanced.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, until the fluctuation display of 100 times) is executed, each fluctuation pattern determination table in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation display of a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach) is normal is used. It may be increased or decreased as compared with the case of determining the fluctuation pattern. In this case, even if the execution of the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is decided at different determination ratios depending on whether the set setting value is 1, 2, or 3. Good. As a result, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or Since the player can pay attention to the number of times the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is executed until the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is executed, the effect of the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is produced. Can be enhanced. Further, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time elapses, or a predetermined number of times of variation display is executed. A variation pattern that can be determined only until is set is provided for each set value, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set for the player by executing the variation display according to the variation pattern according to these set values. It may be possible to notify.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, until the variation display (100 times) is executed, the determination rate of the variation pattern other than the super reach such as non-reach and normal reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a fluctuation pattern different from the normal fluctuation pattern such as non-reach, normal reach, super reach, etc. (for example, the fluctuation time is extremely short, such as 0.1). The determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation pattern having an extremely long fluctuation time such as 10 minutes) may be different.

After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, in the specific period until the variation display (100 times) is executed, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested at the rate at which the specific effect is executed. For example, it is possible to execute a high setting suggestion effect that suggests that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an advantageous setting value for the player, and the setting set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for a specific period. When the value is 1 (the setting value most advantageous to the player), the high setting value suggestion effect is most likely to be executed, and the setting value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3 (the setting value most disadvantageous to the player). ), It is sufficient to make the high setting value suggestion effect most difficult to execute. In a specific period, at least one of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed since the last time the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was stopped. The determination rate of the fluctuation pattern may be different.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as a pachinko gaming machine capable of controlling the gaming state to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends, and the game after the jackpot game ends based on the fact that the game ball passes the third count switch during the jackpot game. The state may be controllable to a probabilistic state. In this case, as the jackpot type, the jackpot type that opens the second jackpot during the jackpot game, that is, the jackpot type that allows the game ball to pass through the third count switch during the jackpot game (hereinafter, jackpot X). The second big prize opening is not opened during the big hit game, that is, the big hit type (hereinafter, big hit Y) in which the game ball cannot pass through the third count switch during the big hit game is provided, and the determination ratio of these big hit X and the big hit Y is provided. May be different depending on the set value. By doing so, it is possible to make the ratio of the game state controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game different according to the set value, so that the game interest can be improved.

In addition to or instead of the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit and the rate at which the big hit type is determined are different, the number of prize balls when the game ball wins each winning opening, and the big hit in each round during the big hit game. The maximum number of winnings of the game ball to the winning opening may be made different according to the set value. Further, the opening patterns of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening during the big hit game may be made different according to the set value. As a result, the number of prize balls given in the big hit game state can be made different according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

A movable body may be provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it may be possible to execute a movable body effect in which the movable body is operated during a game such as a variable display or a big hit game. When such a movable body is provided, variable winning initialization control such as confirmation of advancing / retreating operation of the regulating member inside the second major winning opening can be executed, and at the same time, confirmation of the operation of the movable body and the movable body at the initial position can be performed. When the movable body initialization control to be moved can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 and a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the power is turned on in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1). When a new set value is set in 1), the variable prize initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed. As a result, the new set value can be accurately reflected in the movement of the regulating member or the movable body. The variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed after the execution of step Sa13 or step Sa14 in the main process. For example, variable winning initialization control or movable body initialization control may be executed at the timing when the first timer interrupt occurs. When the variable prize initialization control and the movable body initialization control can be executed, the variable prize initialization control may be started at a timing prior to the movable body initialization control. Alternatively, the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be started at the same time, and the variable winning initialization control may be terminated before the movable body initialization control. As a result, the initialization control related to the winning of the game ball can be appropriately performed.

The determination rate of the super reach fluctuation pattern may differ depending on the set value. The specific variable display pattern may be a fluctuation pattern different from the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. The setting of which variation pattern is used as the specific variable display pattern can be arbitrarily changed according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

21-23 and 21-24 show a modified example in which the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are installed on the side of the main board 11. By providing the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated unless the staff of the game hall or the like opens the frame 3 for the game machine. is there. In addition to this, by providing a security cover 500A that covers the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the pachinko machine frame 3 is closed. It may be possible to prevent an illegal change of the set value of the gaming machine 1.

The security cover 500A is attached to the lower part of the right side of the outer frame 1a. As a result, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A approaches the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated. Can be. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the security cover 500A is separated from the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 can be operated. The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are covered with a cover body from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and when the frame 3 for the game machine is closed, the cover body is covered with a security cover 500A from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. By covering from the back side of the gaming machine 1 (pressing the cover body forward with the security cover 500A), it is more powerful to change the illegal set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It may be possible to prevent it. When the setting changeover switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with a cover body or a security cover 500A instead of the setting changeover switch 52.

FIG. 21-25 shows a modified example in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the security cover 500B may be provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the gaming machine frame 3. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500B is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500B is held on the back of the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52. It suffices to make it immovable from the state of being covered from the side. Then, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be operated by sliding the security cover 500B. When the setting changeover switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500B instead of the setting changeover switch 52.

FIG. 21-26 shows a modified example in which the security cover is rotatably provided. Specifically, the left end portion of the security cover 500C may be rotatably supported with respect to a pivot axis facing in the vertical direction provided on the back surface side of the gaming machine frame 3. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500C is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500C is set as the lock switch 51. The changeover switch 52 and the changeover switch 52 may be made immovable from the state of being covered from the back side. Then, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be operated by rotating the security cover 500C around a pivot axis (not shown). When the setting changeover switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500C instead of the setting changeover switch 52.

When these security covers are provided so as to overlap the main board 11, the security covers are made of a transparent resin material or the like so as not to interfere with the visibility of the mounting surface of the main board 11 and the seal. May be good.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may have different playability such as a probabilistic loop type and a V probabilistic type. In the case of the probabilistic loop type or V probabilistic type, a function (so-called small hit time) that can increase the number of balls held by a small hit that targets the first big winning opening after the end of a specific big hit game is provided. You may have it. In the case of a gaming machine having a small hit time function, the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value (for example, in the case of the set value 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is set to 1/200 and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is set. Is set to 1/20, and in the case of the set value 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is set to 1/300 and the jackpot probability in the probabilistic state is set to 1/30). , Since the initial hit probability is higher than when other set values are set, it is easier to enter the small hit time, but the probability of becoming a big hit during probability variation control is also higher than when other set values are set. Is also high, so it is easy to finish the small hit time. In other words, when a pachinko machine capable of performing probability variation control is equipped with a small hit time function, the higher the setting value for which the large hit probability is set in the normal state, the higher the probability of entering the small hit time, while the smaller the probability. It is difficult for the hit time to continue, and the lower the set value for which the jackpot probability in the normal state is set, the lower the probability of entering the small hit time, but the easier it is for the small hit time to continue. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the probabilistic loop type and the V probabilistic type, not only the range of the game can be expanded by installing the small hit time function, but also a set value with a low big hit probability is set. Even with the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player can be motivated to play the game.

In the V-probability variation type pachinko gaming machine 1, the opening pattern of the probability variation control determination large winning opening in the probability variation control determination round is a long-term opening pattern (the opening pattern in which the game ball easily wins the probability variation control determination large winning opening ) And the short-term opening pattern (opening pattern in which the game ball is difficult to win in the large winning opening for probability variation control), these long-term opening patterns and short-term opening patterns are set according to the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By deciding at different ratios, the actual probability of entering the probability variation (probability variation jackpot ratio) may be different.

A gate for determining the jackpot type is provided at a predetermined position in the game area (for example, a position above the second big winning opening), and the game ball passes through the jackpot type determination gate after the special symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot. The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be extracted at the same timing, and the jackpot game according to the jackpot type determined based on the extracted MR2 value may be started. When the jackpot type determination gate is provided in this way, the jackpot type is determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, 16 round jackpot and 4 round jackpot are provided as the jackpot type). If the setting value is 1, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds jackpot is the highest, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When is 3, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds jackpot is the lowest).

The lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 may be provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3. When the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 in this way, the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is used on the ball striking operation handle or the ball striking launcher. By providing it in the vicinity, the glass door frame 3a may not be operated unless it is opened.

It is only necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot gaming state, at least in a different ratio depending on the set value, and the jackpot type and The fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. It fluctuates at a different rate according to the set value. While deciding whether to set the display result as "big hit" or "small hit", the big hit type is common regardless of the set value. And when the fluctuation pattern is determined, even if the set value is changed, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern is not changed, so that the set value is not suggested to the player or the like, or it is difficult to suggest it. When not only the fluctuation display result but also the fluctuation pattern is determined at a different ratio according to the set value, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern is also changed when the set value is changed. The setting value can be suggested, or it becomes easy to suggest.

As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the CPU 103 executes the main process when the power supply is started by turning on the power, so that the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 operate. Depending on the detection result, it is possible to control any of the setting change state, setting confirmation state, initialization state, and power failure recovery state. The setting change state is a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001. The setting confirmation state is a state in which the set value can be confirmed on the display monitor 29. The initialization state is different from the setting change state and the setting confirmation state, and is a state in which the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared). The power failure recovery state is a state in which the stored contents of the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of the power failure.

FIG. 21-27 shows an example of state control in response to switch detection when the power is turned on. If the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started by turning on the power based on the operation of the power switch AK002, the setting change process is performed in step Sa13 of the main process. By being executed, the setting change state is controlled. In this case, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process. On the other hand, when the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the setting confirmation process is executed in the main process step AKS002 to set the settings. Control the confirmation status. In this case, step Sa9 of the main process is not executed, and the stored contents of the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of power failure by steps Sa41 and Sa42. When the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process, so that the initialization state is established. To control. In this case, since it is determined in step Sa12 of the main process that the lock switch 51 is off, the setting change process of step Sa13 is not executed. When the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of power failure by the main processing steps Sa41 and Sa42. By doing so, the power failure recovery state is controlled. In this case, since it is determined in step AKS001 of the main process that the lock switch 51 is off, the setting confirmation process of step AKS002 is not executed. In this way, along with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 detect various operations such as on / off switching operation and pressing operation by the staff of the amusement park. , The state can be controlled according to the detection results.

(Explanation of means related to the above feature section)
The above embodiment includes the following feature parts. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine in which a set value can be set, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 is provided with a dedicated setting value display means for displaying the set setting value, thereby preventing an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. There was a problem that it could not be done. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 related to a feature unit that solves this problem,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting change process of Sa13) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting value 1 to the setting value 3),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
A game that adds game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening, etc.) Value-adding means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the process while the jackpot is open),
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 29) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means, and
With
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this means 1, it is not necessary to individually provide a display device for displaying the set set value, so that the cost increase of the gaming machine can be prevented. Can be done.

As a gaming machine of means 2 of the above-mentioned feature part,
The information display means can display predetermined information according to a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, a base, etc. on the display monitor 29).
The gaming machine described in the means 1 characterized by the above is described, and in this means 2, the state of the gaming machine can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of means 3 of the above-mentioned feature part,
The information display means can sequentially display predetermined information of each set value (for example, the display monitor 29 displays short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative continuous ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2). (Parts that are displayed sequentially at 5-second intervals, etc.)
The gaming machine described in the means 2 characterized by the above is described, and in the means 3, it is possible to easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

As a gaming machine of means 4 of the above-mentioned feature part,
The information display means can display predetermined information of each set value in different display modes (for example, the set value 1 displays the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in red, and the set value 2 shows the continuous ratio. The role ratio and base are displayed in green, and at the setting value 3, the continuous ratio, role ratio, and base are displayed in blue, etc.)
The gaming machine described in the means 2 or the means 3 is described, and the means 4 can easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

As a gaming machine of means 5 of the above-mentioned feature part,
Equipped with an operating means (for example, display changeover switch 30)
The information display means can switch and display predetermined information of each set value according to the operation of the operation means (for example, by operating the display changeover switch 30, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base of the set value 1 can be displayed. The part that switches the display to the display of the set value 2 connection ratio, combination ratio, and base, and the display of the setting value 2 connection ratio, combination ratio, and base are changed to the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base display of setting value 3. Switching part, etc.)
The gaming machine described in any one of the means 2 to the means 4 is described, and the means 5 can easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

As a gaming machine of means 6 of the above-mentioned feature part,
The information display means displays predetermined information according to the set value set by the setting means (for example, a portion capable of displaying only the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base according to the set set value. Such)
The gaming machine described in any one of the means 2 to the means 5 characterized by the above is described, and in this means 6, the work of confirming the predetermined information of the set value set by the setting means is easily performed. be able to.

As a gaming machine of means 7 of the above-mentioned feature part,
Calculation means that can calculate information about the game value given by the game value-giving means (for example, the ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), and the cumulative ratio (%) for 6000 CPU 103s, the combination. The part for calculating the ratio (%), the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 1 (%)), and the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 2 (%)). Etc.)
The calculation means can individually calculate the information for each set value (for example, a general prize ball, a first starting opening prize ball, an ordinary electric prize ball, a special electric prize ball, a total prize ball, etc. The total input is stored in the storage area (ring buffer) according to the set value, so that it can be calculated individually for each set value, etc.),
The information display means displays only the information corresponding to the specific set value of any one of the set values (for example, the ratio corresponding to the set value of any one of the set value 1 to the set value 3). Role ratio, part where only the base can be displayed, etc.)
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 6 is described, and the means 7 can easily confirm the information.

As a gaming machine of means 8 of the above-mentioned feature part,
Calculation means that can calculate information about the game value given by the game value-giving means (for example, the ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), and the cumulative ratio (%) for 6000 CPU 103s, the combination. The part for calculating the ratio (%), the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 1 (%)), and the base calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls (base 2 (%)). Etc.)
The calculation means can individually calculate individual information which is the information according to each set value, and can also calculate compound information which is the information according to two or more different set values (for example,). The total ratio, combination ratio, base calculation part, etc. of 2 or more set values),
The information display means can display the information and the composite information (for example, a portion that calculates a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base in two or more set values and can display them on the display monitor 29).
The gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 7 is described, and according to the means 8, the state of the gaming machine can be grasped in more detail.

(Explanation of production control related to other feature parts)
FIG. 21-28 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the embodiment including the above-mentioned feature unit. It suffices that this effect control main process can be executed instead of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the same initialization process (step AKS011) as in the above embodiment, and then, unlike the above embodiment, the power-on command process (step). AKS012) is executed. After executing the command processing at power-on, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013), and if it is off (step AKS013; No), as in the above embodiment. The process of step AKS013 is repeatedly executed and waits. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off (step AKS014), the command analysis process (step AKS015), and the effect control process process. (Step AKS016) and the effect random number update process (step AKS017) are executed in order.

FIG. 21-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS012 as the command process at power-on. For example, the effect control CPU 120 acquires an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 as a reception command with the start of power supply, and determines the content thereof. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the command 9000H which is the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021). If it is not a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the command 9200H, which is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022). If it is not a power failure recovery stop command (step AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the command 9100H that is the setting change start command (step AKS023). If it is not the setting change start command (step AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the command 9400H which is the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024). If it is not the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; No), the process returns to step AKS021, and steps AKS021 to AKS024 are repeatedly executed and waited until the reception command is acquired. If the reception command cannot be acquired and a predetermined error determination time has elapsed, it may be notified that an error of the reception command has occurred.

If it is determined in step AKS023 that the reception command is a setting change start command (step AKS023; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step AKS025). In the game stop state start processing, the progress of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game is stopped in response to the game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state start processing executed in step AKS025, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, commands other than the setting change end command are set to invalidate reception. do it. As a result, it is sufficient to regulate so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, are not executed. When the setting change start command is received, various effects associated with the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting change state and the game is not in the game stop state are not executed. There is a limit as a range or a limit.

After the game stop state start processing is executed in step AKS025, control is performed to start the setting change notification (step AKS026). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting change notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the setting change notification, and outputs the setting change notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control should be performed. After the control of the setting change notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step AKS027). In step AKS027, when the command received from the main board 11 is the command 93XXH which is the setting change end command, it may be determined that the setting change is completed. If the setting change end command is not received and the setting change is not completed (step AKS027; No), step AKS027 is repeatedly executed and waits.

When it is determined in step AKS027 to end the setting change (step AKS027; Yes), control is performed to end the setting change notification (step AKS028). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting change notification screen in the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting change notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R. After the control of the setting change notification is completed in this way, the processing at the end of the game stop state is executed (step AKS029). In the process at the end of the game stop state, a setting may be made to enable command reception from the main board 11, which has been invalidated. As a result, the regulation may be lifted so that various effects as the game progresses, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

After that, control is performed to execute the initialization notification (step AKS030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 initializes to the effect display device 5 in the initialization notification period until a predetermined initialization notification time elapses, based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the initialization notification. Control may be performed so that the notification screen is displayed and the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Even if it is determined in step AKS021 that the reception command is a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; Yes), the initialization notification may be executed by proceeding to step AKS030. In this way, it is possible to notify that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been initialized (cleared) in response to the case where an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected with the start of power supply by turning on the power.

If it is determined in step AKS024 that the reception command is the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step AKS031). In the game stop state start processing executed in step AKS031, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, commands other than the setting confirmation end command are set to invalidate reception. do it. As a result, it is sufficient to regulate so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, are not executed. When the setting confirmation start command is received, various effects associated with the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting confirmation state and the game is not in the stop state are not executed. There is a limit as a range or a limit.

After the game stop state start processing is executed in step AKS031, control is performed to start the setting confirmation notification (step AKS032). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting confirmation notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the setting confirmation notification, and outputs the setting confirmation notification voice from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control should be performed. After the control of the setting confirmation notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation (step AKS033). In step AKS033, when the command received from the main board 11 is the command 9401H which is the setting confirmation end command, it may be determined that the setting confirmation is completed. If the setting confirmation end command is not received and the setting confirmation is not completed (step AKS033; No), step AKS033 is repeatedly executed and waits.

When it is determined in step AKS033 that the setting confirmation is completed (step AKS033; Yes), control is performed to end the setting confirmation notification (step AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting confirmation notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, after the control of the setting confirmation notification is completed, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS035). As a result, the regulation may be lifted so that various effects as the game progresses, such as a variable display of the effect symbol and an effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

After that, control may be performed to execute the power failure recovery notification. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the power failure recovery notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the power failure recovery notification, and outputs the power failure recovery notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, control may be performed. Even when it is determined in step AKS022 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022; Yes), the power failure recovery notification may be executed. In these cases, if it is possible to notify that the stored contents of the RAM 102 have been restored to the contents at the time of a power failure in response to the case where the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is not detected when the power supply is started by turning on the power. Good.

FIG. 21-30 shows the priority of control with respect to notification by effect control, screen display, and the like in this embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled as the power supply is started by turning on the power. Correspondingly, the effect control CPU 120 executes the game stop state start processing in the step AKS025 and the step AKS031 of the power-on command processing. After the game stop state start processing is executed, the reception of commands different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the control related to the normal effect is restricted from being executed. Therefore, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the effect control. For example, the priority AKP02 of the setting screen such as the power saving function has a lower priority than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The power saving function setting screen shows the power saving function when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game machine frame 3) is set to a predetermined position as a specific position. It is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device 5 in order to enable the presence / absence, type, setting of the current date / time by RTC, and the like. Since the priority AKP03 such as the magnet error notification has a lower priority than the priority AKP02 such as the power saving function setting screen, the priority is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. Since the priority AKP0Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game in the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, the priority is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. It becomes a degree.

In this way, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is higher than the priority AKP02 of the setting screen such as the power saving function, so that the control to start the setting change notification is performed by the step AKS026 of the command processing at power-on. If the setting is changed or the setting confirmation notification is started by step AKS032, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch is temporarily switched to a specific position before the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed. Even if this happens, the display of the power saving function setting screen is not started by switching the output amount changeover switch. In this way, the display related to the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the setting change notification screen and the setting confirmation notification screen is displayed with priority over the display related to the output amount or output control of the effect such as the power saving function setting screen. As a result, the display related to the set value is appropriately displayed, and it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

(Explanation of modified examples related to production control in other feature parts)
FIG. 21-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process executed in the modified example in which the setting confirmation process can be executed during the game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be confirmed when the power is turned on, and the confirmation of the set value may be executed during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the gaming machine frame 3 is opened by the staff of the game hall or the like, and the switching operation of turning on the lock switch 51 is performed. When the operation is detected, the display monitor 29 causes the first display unit 29A to display the set value set in the current pachinko gaming machine 1. This display is not changed even if the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed by a staff member of the game hall, and is a display for confirming the set value set in the current pachinko game machine 1. There is. When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started during the game, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Command 9400H is transmitted. When the execution of the setting confirmation process is completed, the setting confirmation state ends, and the command 9401H, which is a setting confirmation end command, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the effect control main process in the modified example, after the effect random number update process is executed in step AKS017, the ongoing setting confirmation process (step AKS01A) is executed, and then the process returns to step AKS013.

FIG. 21-32 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS01A as the ongoing setting confirmation process. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting is being confirmed so that the set value can be confirmed on the display monitor 29 (step AKS051). In step AKS051, for example, it may be determined that the setting is being confirmed during the period from the control in step AKS058 to the control in step AKS060. If the setting is not being confirmed (step AKS051; No), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS052). At this time, when the setting confirmation start command is received (step AKS052; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in progress (step AKS053). In step AKS053, it is determined that the game is not in progress in the period from receiving the customer waiting demo designation command transmitted from the main board 11 to receiving the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command. In other periods, it may be determined that the game is in progress.

If it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is in progress (step AKS053; Yes), the in-progress setting confirmation flag is set to the on state (step AKS054). The in-progress setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that the setting confirmation start command has been received while the game is in progress. Waiting for customers sent from the main board 11 after determining that the setting confirmation start command has not been received in step AKS052 (step AKS052; No) or after turning on the ongoing setting confirmation flag in step AKS054. It is determined whether or not the demo designation command has been received (step AKS055). At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command is not received (step AKS055; No), the ongoing setting confirmation process ends.

When it is determined in step AKS055 that the customer waiting demo designation command has been received (step AKS055; Yes), it is determined whether or not the in-progress setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056). At this time, if the in-progress setting confirmation flag is off (step AKS056; No), the in-progress setting confirmation process ends. On the other hand, when the in-progress setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056; Yes), the setting confirmation notification is started after the in-progress setting confirmation flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS057). (Step AKS058). Even if it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is not in progress (step AKS053; No), the process proceeds to step AKS058, and control is performed to start the setting confirmation notification. As a result, when the setting confirmation start command is received while the game is in progress, the setting confirmation notification can be started after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command.

If it is determined in step AKS051 that the setting is being confirmed (step AKS051; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059). At this time, if the setting confirmation end command has not been received (step AKS059; No), the ongoing setting confirmation process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059; Yes), control is performed to end the setting confirmation notification (step AKS060).

By executing such an ongoing setting confirmation process, when the setting confirmation process is executed during the game and the set value set is displayed on the display monitor 29, the effect control board 12 side may display the set value. After receiving the customer waiting demo display command transmitted from the main board 11, the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice can be started. As a result, when the set value can be confirmed during the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game, the inconvenience due to the confirmation of the set value can be prevented by preventing the effect being executed from being canceled.

When the setting confirmation process is executed during the game on the side of the main board 11, the setting confirmation state may be controlled after the customer waiting demo designation command can be transmitted. In this case, for example, a setting confirmation start command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 together with the customer waiting demo designation command. Alternatively, instead of sending the setting confirmation start command together with the customer waiting demo designation command, a dedicated command corresponding to the setting confirmation during the game is sent, and the set value set after the progress of the game is completed. It may be possible to control the state in which the above can be confirmed.

Alternatively, the set set value is displayed on the display monitor 29 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the effect display device 5 does not need to display the set value. Therefore, when the setting confirmation process is executed during the game, the display monitor 29 displays a display on which the setting value can be confirmed without transmitting a setting confirmation start command or the like from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Control to start may be performed. In this case, the effect control board 12 may be controlled by the effect control CPU 120 or the like so that the effect is continuously executed as the game progresses.

In addition to the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification, the setting change end notification and the setting confirmation end notification may be executed. For example, in the command processing at power-on, the setting change notification ends by the control in step AKS028, the setting change end notification starts with the start of the setting change end notification period, and the setting change end notification period ends. The setting change end notification may be terminated. Further, in the command processing at power-on, the setting confirmation notification is terminated by the control in step AKS034, the setting confirmation end notification is started with the start of the setting confirmation end notification period, and the setting confirmation end notification period is completed. The setting confirmation end notification may be terminated.

In the setting change notification, control may be performed so that the setting change notification voice is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5. In the setting confirmation notification, control may be performed so that the setting confirmation notification voice is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5. Alternatively, in the setting change notification, in addition to the display of the setting change notification screen and the output of the setting change notification voice, or instead of a part or all of the setting change notification, a part or all of the light emitting members of the game effect lamp 9, or the game effect lamp 9 Control may be performed to cause an arbitrary light emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from the notification lamp to emit light in a predetermined setting change notification mode. In the setting confirmation notification, in addition to the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice, or in place of part or all, part or all of the game effect lamp 9, a part of the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, control may be performed so that all the light emitting members or any light emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a predetermined setting confirmation notification mode. As described above, the setting change notification may be performed by using an arbitrary effect device or a notification device different from the effect device to notify that the set value can be changed. The setting confirmation notification may be performed by using an arbitrary effect device or a notification device different from the effect device to notify that the set value can be confirmed. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the form in which the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification are performed, and one or both of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification may not be performed.

The command 93XXH, which is the setting change end command, and the 9401H, which is the setting confirmation end command, are not limited to the prepared form, and a common setting end time command is used as the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command. It may be something that can be done. In this case, in the power-on command processing, it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is completed when the setting end command is received, and the setting confirmation is finished when the setting end command is received in step AKS033. Then, it should be judged.

(Explanation of feature 71AK)
FIG. 21-33 shows a configuration example of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to the feature portion 71AK of this embodiment. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the upper right portion of the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 can be operated from the outside through an opening formed in the substrate case for accommodating the effect control substrate 12. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be a rotary switch capable of detecting a predetermined operation such as a switch changeover operation for initializing a predetermined effect output or the like. The effect output initially set by the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may include at least the volume of the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, the amount of light emitted from a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be included. For example, when the staff of the game hall opens the frame 3 for the game machine, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 becomes operable. As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is required to open the gaming machine frame 3 so that the initial setting of the effect output can be changed. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 initially sets the effect output to one of a plurality of stages. Further, depending on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, it is possible to switch whether to allow or prohibit the change adjustment of the effect output by the player using the stick controller 31A or the like. The effect control CPU 120 may store data indicating such effect output settings in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like as output setting information.

As shown in FIG. 21-33 (B), the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 has a total of 16 channels from “0” to “F”, and the knob 71AK002 is rotated to be a channel. The corresponding switch position can be switched. In this embodiment, the volume is initially set to one of the six stages according to which of the "0" to "F" the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is, and the volume is adjusted by the player. Whether to allow or not is switched. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is connected to the effect control CPU 120 directly or via a predetermined circuit, and a changeover switch signal indicating the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is input to the effect control CPU 120 to correspond to a channel. The switch position can be specified.

FIG. 21-34 shows the initial setting control 71AKC01 such as the effect output according to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. In this initial setting control 71AKC01, for example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "5", the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set according to "volume 6 (maximum)". The upper limit volume is initially set to "97.0", and the volume can be set (adjusted) by the player (permitted). The volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited, and the output amount of an arbitrary effect device such as the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 may be initially set according to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. .. When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any of "6" to "F", the volume setting (adjustment) by the player is disabled (prohibited). Is executed. Further, corresponding to the case where the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "F", the effect display device 5 can display the setting screen for the power saving function, etc., and the presence / absence and type (power saving mode) of the power saving function, and The RTC126 can set (change) a value indicating the current date and time.

As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output is received by the knob 71AK002, based on the detection of the operation of switching the switch position. , It is possible to control the output amount of the effect to any of multiple stages. In the effect control CPU 120, a process for controlling the output amount of the effect to any one of a plurality of stages is executed based on the switch signal capable of specifying the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

FIG. 21-35 shows an execution example of the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification with respect to the feature unit 71AK. In this execution example, as the setting change notification, as shown in FIG. 21-35 (A), the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the setting change notification voice 71AKE01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. .. Further, as the setting confirmation notification, as shown in FIG. 21-35 (B), the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the setting confirmation notification voice 71AKE02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As the initialization notification, as shown in FIG. 21-35 (C), the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the initialization notification voice 71AKE03 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the feature unit 71AK, the command processing at power-on is executed in the step AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the same manner as in the above embodiment. In this power-on command process, the setting change notification is started by the control in step AKS026, and the setting change notification is finished by the control in step AKS028. Further, the control in step AKS032 starts the setting confirmation notification, and the control in step AKS034 ends the setting confirmation notification. Further, by the control in step AKS030, the initialization notification is started when the initialization notification period starts, and the initialization notification ends when the initialization notification period ends. The setting change notification screen 71AKD01, the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02, and the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 are not limited to the mode in which they are displayed on the entire display area of the effect display device 5, and are a part of the display area of the effect display device 5. It may be the mode shown in.

The feature unit 71AK is configured to include an output amount changeover switch 71AK001, and can perform initial setting such that the effect output such as volume is set to one of a plurality of stages corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. On the other hand, the audio output in the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification is the maximum volume that can be output by the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. Output may be performed at a certain "volume 6 (maximum)" (upper limit volume "97.0"). For example, in the setting change notification, the setting change notification voice 71AKE01 that notifies the message "setting is being changed" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the setting confirmation notification, the setting confirmation notification voice 71AKE02, which notifies the message "setting is being confirmed", is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the initialization notification, the initialization notification voice 71AKE03, which notifies the message "initialized", is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume.

In this way, according to the operation of switching the switch position in the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output is detected, and the output amount of the effect is controlled to one of a plurality of stages based on the detection. In the setting change notification, which is a notification regarding the change of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting change notification voice 71AKE01 is notified by the maximum volume which is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output. .. Also in the setting confirmation notification and the initialization notification, the setting confirmation notification voice 71AKE02 and the initialization notification voice 71AKE03 may be notified at the maximum volume which is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output. In this way, since the notification is performed by the common output amount, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts due to the change and confirmation of the set value and the initialization (clearing) of the stored contents in the RAM 102.

FIG. 21-36 shows a display example when the player volume adjustment, the power saving function setting, and the like are performed with respect to the feature unit 71AK. For example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "0" and the effect output has not yet been adjusted by the player, the volume setting is "volume 1 (minimum)". FIG. 21-36 (A) shows the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 includes an effect image showing six memories corresponding to six levels of volume, and the display color of each memory is changed according to the current volume. For example, when the volume setting is "Volume 1 (minimum)", one memory is displayed in the first display color (for example, red), while the remaining five memories are displayed in the second display color (for example, white). .. At this time, in response to the detection of the operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A to the right, the volume setting is changed to "volume 2", and the first on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11. Increase the display color memory by one. In this way, each time the first operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the first direction (right direction, etc.) is detected, a multi-step effect is produced until the effect output setting reaches the maximum. The output amount may be changed so as to increase one step at a time. On the other hand, each time the second operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the second direction (left direction) is detected, the effect output amount in a plurality of stages is increased until the effect output setting reaches the minimum. It may be changed so as to decrease one step at a time.

When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "F", the power saving function and the value of RTC126 can be set. FIG. 21-36 (B) shows a power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 includes a display area for setting the power saving function and a display area for setting the value of the current date and time (current time) by the RTC126. When the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is displayed, the presence / absence and type of the power saving function (power saving mode), depending on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the staff of the amusement park or the like. Then, the RTC126 sets (changes) a value indicating the current date and time. The effect control CPU 120 executes a process for setting (changing) the power saving function or the like based on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 and the detection of the operation of changing each setting. For example, when it is set to select "power saving mode A" on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, the control to activate the power saving function is performed only during the customer waiting demonstration in which the demo screen is displayed. Anything that is done will do. In addition, when it is set to select "power saving mode B" on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, for example, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the variable display in addition to the customer waiting demonstration. Anything may be used as long as it is controlled to activate the power saving function such as reducing (light emission amount).

FIG. 21-37 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the feature unit 71AK. It suffices that this effect control main process can be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the feature unit 71AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization process (step 71AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 71AKS012) in the same manner as in the above embodiment. The initialization process of step 71AKS011 is a process corresponding to the initialization process of step AKS011 in the above embodiment, and the power-on command process of step 71AKS012 is a process corresponding to the power-on process of step AKS012 in the above embodiment. It should be. After executing the power-on command process in step 71AKS012, the start output switching process (step AKS013) is executed, unlike the above embodiment. After that, as in the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014), and if it is off (step 71AKS014; No), the process of step 71AKS014 is repeatedly executed. And wait. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off (step 71AKS015), the command analysis process (step 71AKS016), and the effect control process process. (Step 71AKS017) and the effect random number update process (step 71AKS018) are executed in order. Further, in the effect control main process of the feature unit 71AK, the ongoing output change process (step 71AKS019) is executed, and then the process returns to step 71AKS014.

FIG. 21-38 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 71AKS013 as the output switching process at the start. In the start output switching process, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the switch position based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS031). At this time, it is determined whether or not the specified switch position is “F” (step 71AKS032). Then, when the switch position is other than "F" (step 71AKS032; No), control is performed to switch the initial setting of the output amount by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (step 71AKS033), and the output at the start is performed. The switching process ends. In step 71AKS033, for example, initial output setting data indicating that the switch position corresponding to the channel can be specified may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

When it is determined in step 71AKS032 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS032; Yes), control is performed to start setting the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may control the effect display device 5 to display the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like. After the control for setting the power saving function or the like is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting is completed (step 71AKS035). In step 71AKS035, when the selection of the item indicating "end" is confirmed on the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, it may be determined that the setting is completed. If this setting is not completed (step 71AKS035; No), the corresponding control is performed during the setting of the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS036), and the process returns to step 71AKS035. In step 71AKS036, the display on the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 can be changed according to the detection of the operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A and the detection of the operation of pressing the push button 31B. As you can see, control should be performed.

When it is determined in step 71AKS035 that the setting is completed (step 71AKS035; Yes), control is performed to end the setting such as the power saving function (step 71AKS037), and the output switching process at the start is ended. In step 71AKS037, for example, the effect control CPU 120 stores power saving function data indicating the presence / absence and type (power saving mode) of the power saving function in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like. Further, when the setting for changing the value of RTC126 is made, the data indicating the changed value is set in RTC126.

FIG. 21-39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 71AKS019 as the ongoing output change process. In the in-progress output change process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051). The switching permission condition may be predetermined as a condition for permitting the adjustment of the effect output using the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 during the execution of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the switching permission condition may be satisfied. When such a changeover permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051; Yes), the switch position is detected based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS052). Based on this detection result, it is determined whether or not the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053). For example, the effect control CPU 120 compares the switch position shown in the initial output setting data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the switch position specified from the changeover switch signal, and when the comparison result does not match. , It may be determined that the switch position has been changed.

When it is determined in step 71AKS053 that the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053; Yes), it is determined whether or not the changed switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054). At this time, if the switch position is other than "F" (step 71AKS054; No), control is performed to switch the initial setting of the output amount by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (step 71AKS055). In step 71AKS055, for example, the initial output setting data indicating that the switch position corresponding to the channel can be specified may be stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

When it is determined in step 71AKS054 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054; Yes), control is performed to start setting the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS056). In this case, the same processing as in steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037 of the output switching process at the start may be executed. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting is completed (step 71AKS057), and if it is not completed (step 71AKS057; No), the corresponding control is performed during the setting of the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS058), and step 71AKS057. Return to. After that, when the setting is completed (step 71AKS057; Yes), control is performed to end the setting of the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS058).

If the switching permission condition is not satisfied in step 71AKS051 (step 71AKS051; No), if the switch position is not changed in step 71AKS053 (step 71AKS053; No), or control is performed in step 71AKS055 or step 71AKS059. After that, it is determined whether or not the volume and the like can be adjusted by the player based on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS060). In step 71AKS060, when the current switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any of "0" to "5", the volume can be set (adjusted) by the player (permission). , It may be determined that the adjustment by the player is possible. If adjustment by the player is not possible (prohibited) (step 71AKS060; No), the ongoing output change process is terminated. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the one that determines whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied in step 71AKS051, and the switch position may be detected by step 71AKS052 without making the determination by step 71AKS051.

When it is determined in step 71AKS060 that the adjustment by the player is possible (step 71AKS060; Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a detection of an operation for changing the output amount of the effect (step 71AKS061). In step 71AKS061, for example, when the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 is displayed, the operation of changing the effect output amount in a plurality of stages is detected based on the detection result of the operation of operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. It is sufficient to judge whether or not it was present. If no such operation is detected (step 71AKS061; No), the ongoing output change process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation has been detected (step 71AKS061; Yes), the output amount is adjusted according to the detection result (step 71AKS062), and the ongoing output change process is terminated. In step 71AKS062, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11, the update output setting data indicating the changed volume setting and the like is stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Just let me do it.

(Explanation of a modified example of the feature 71AK)
FIG. 21-40 shows the priority of control with respect to the notification by the effect control, the screen display, and the like in the modified example of the feature unit 71AK. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped when the setting is changed when the power supply is started by turning on the power. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the game may be controlled so as not to be in the game stop state. Correspondingly, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the game stop state start processing in the power-on command processing step AKS031, and when the setting is confirmed, for example, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is used. The input of the changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position may be enabled. In this case, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, and is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen and the like. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification has a lower priority than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen such as the power saving function. Since the priority 71AKP1Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game in the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, the priority AKP11 of the setting change notification, the power saving function setting screen, etc. The priority is lower than the priority 71AKP12 and the setting confirmation notification priority AKP13.

As described above, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen and the like. Therefore, when the control to start the setting change notification is performed by the step AKS026 of the command processing at power-on. Is involved in detecting the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 even if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to a specific position of "F" before the setting change is completed. The display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is not started. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen, etc., so that when the control to start the setting confirmation notification is performed by the step AKS032 of the command processing at power-on. Saves power based on the detection of the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position of "F" before the setting confirmation is completed. The display of the function setting screen 71AKD12 may be started. In this way, while the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect is not executed when the set value is changed, the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect may be executed when the set value is confirmed. .. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the stage of the output amount of the effect while confirming the set value in order to prevent the setting value change work from being hindered.

By executing the power-on command process in step 71AKS012 and then executing the start output switching process in step 71AKS013, it is possible to detect the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 when the setting is changed. Regardless of this, it is not limited to the form that limits the control of the output amount of the effect so as not to be executed, and whether or not the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected by the command processing at power-on. When the judgment is possible and the operation is detected, the information indicating that the switch position can be specified is stored, and after the setting change state is completed, the output amount of the effect is controlled based on the stored information. It may be something to do. For example, in the power-on command process of the above embodiment, when it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is not completed, the switch position is specified based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. At this time, the information indicating the specific result of the switch position is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. After that, in step 71AKS031 of the output switching process at the start, the switch position of the output amount switching switch 71AK001 may be specified based on the information indicating the specifying result of the switch position. Also in this case, when the setting is changed, it is possible to limit the control of the output amount of the effect regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

Alternatively, when the setting is changed, it is determined whether or not the switch position is a specific switch position, for example, whether or not the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "F", and the case is a specific switch position. The control of displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 on the effect display device 5 may be prioritized over the control of displaying the power saving function setting screen 71AKD 12 on the effect display device 5. In this case, when the setting change notification is completed by the control in step AKS028 of the command processing at power-on, the control for displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01, which has been prioritized, on the effect display device 5 is also terminated. It suffices if the display device 5 can start displaying the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12.

Unlike the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, a detection device capable of detecting an operation performed by the player is provided, and the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed based on the detection of the operation by the detection device. May be good. For example, together with or in place of the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001, a setting value change switch capable of detecting an operation such as a switching operation or a pressing operation by the player is provided, and the operation of the player is detected by the setting value changing switch. Based on the above, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed in the same manner as when the operation is detected by the clear switch AK001.

As described above, in the effect control main process of the feature unit 71AK, the power-on command process is executed in step 71AKS012 as in the above embodiment, and then the start output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the power-on command process, for example, in step AKS025 and step AKS031, the game stop state start process is executed. After the game stop state start processing is executed, the reception of commands different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the control related to the normal effect is restricted from being executed. In this case, the input of the changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is also invalid, so that the effect output is adjusted according to the switch position and the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is not displayed. , Control based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is restricted (prohibited). In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the change of the set value with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the effect is produced regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect. Execution of control to switch the initial setting of the output amount of is restricted (prohibited). As a result, the control for changing the set value has priority over the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control CPU 120 is provided on the effect control board. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and the knob 71AK002 receives an operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect. As a result, the initial setting of the output amount of the effect can be appropriately switched in order to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

In the effect control main process of the feature unit 71AK, after executing the power-on command process in step 71AKS012, the start output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013, step 71AKS033 controls to switch the initial setting of the effect output according to the switch position, or steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037 controls to set the power saving function and the like. In this way, when the setting change state is controlled as the change permission state with the start of the power supply, if there is a detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 before the setting change state ends, After the setting change state is completed, the output amount stage of the effect is controlled based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. As a result, the initial setting of the output amount of the effect can be appropriately switched in order to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

When setting change notification is performed by the display screen of the effect display device 5 or the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is irrespective of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. , It is output at the maximum volume that can be output by the pachinko game machine 1. In this way, when notifying with a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered. Can also be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

(Explanation of means related to feature 71AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature portion 71AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine whose settings related to the effect can be changed, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29614. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2015-29614, control when changing the setting of the effect is not considered while changing a plurality of settings having different advantages. It was. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 71AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means when the power supply is started, and
A detection means for effect adjustment (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001, etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to adjustment of the output amount of the effect, and
Output amount control means for controlling the output amount of the effect to any of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means (for example, the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013 and the ongoing output change process of step 71AKS019). CPU 120 for production control to be executed, etc.) and
In the change permission state, the limiting means for limiting the execution of control by the output amount control means regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection means (for example, as a command process at power-on in step 71AKS012, step AKS012 A CPU 120 for effect control that executes processing, etc.)
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the execution of control by the output amount control means is restricted when the change permission state is set, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

Further, as a gaming machine of means F according to the feature unit 71AK for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2015-29614.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means when the power supply is started, and
A detection means for effect adjustment (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001, etc.) capable of detecting an operation related to adjustment of the output amount of the effect, and
Output amount control means for controlling the output amount of the effect to any of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means (for example, the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013 and the ongoing output change process of step 71AKS019). CPU 120 for production control to be executed, etc.) and
In the change permission state, the limiting means for restricting the execution of control by the output amount control means regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection means (for example, as a command process at power-on in step 71AKS012, step AKS012 Equipped with an effect control CPU 120, etc. that executes processing)
further,
It is possible to execute control corresponding to an advantageous period advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state, a low accuracy high base state, a high accuracy high base state including a special zone, a small hit game state).
A game value-giving means for giving a game value (for example, a prize ball) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a prize ball process) and
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control process process) and
With the game value totaling means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of 113SGS308 or 113SGS319 of the prize ball number display processing shown in FIG. 8-17) that can total the game value given by the game value adding means. ,
With the total value display means capable of displaying the total value totaled by the game value totaling means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of 113SGS309 or 113SGS320 of the prize ball number display processing shown in FIG. 8-17). ,
With
The advantageous period is a specific period (for example, a jackpot gaming state) and a period connected to the specific period, and the degree of advantage for the player is different from the specific period, and a specific notification effect advantageous for the player is executed. A predetermined period (for example, a high-accuracy high-based state including a special zone) and a special period (for example, a low-accuracy high-based state) in which the specific period and the predetermined period have different advantages for the player are included.
The game value totaling means is the first total value which is the total value of the game value given by the game value giving means in the advantageous period (for example, the value of all the prize balls paid out during the consecutive villa). The second aggregated value (for example, paid during the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot A), which is the aggregated value of the game value given by the game value-giving means during the specific period and the predetermined period. It is possible to add up the number of prize balls issued and the number of prize balls paid out during the special zone).
The aggregated value display means can display the first aggregated value and the second aggregated value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-23, of all the prize balls paid out during the consecutive villas. The value of the first prize ball counter, which is the total value, 113SG005A, and the number of prize balls paid out during the big hit game of the probability variation big hit A, and the second prize ball, which is the total value of the number of prize balls paid out during the special zone. A gaming machine characterized in that the value 113SG005B of a number counter can be displayed on the image display device 5).
According to this feature, since the execution of control by the output amount control means is restricted in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent an obstacle in the work of changing the set value. In addition, the aggregated value in the advantageous period can be appropriately displayed.

As a gaming machine of means 2 related to the feature unit 71AK,
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that controls the execution of an effect according to the progress of the game, and
It is provided with an effect control board (for example, an effect control board 12) provided with the effect control means.
The effect control board is further provided with a receiving means (for example, a knob 71AK002 of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001) that receives an operation that can be detected by the effect adjusting detection means.
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an obstacle in the work of changing the set value while appropriately controlling the output amount of the effect.

As a gaming machine of means 3 related to the feature unit 71AK,
When the output amount control means detects an operation by the effect adjusting detection means before the change permission state ends, the output amount control means operates after the change permission state ends. Control in the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of (for example, execution of the output switching process at the start in step 71AKS013).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 or means 2 according to the feature unit 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an obstacle in the work of changing the set value while appropriately controlling the stage of the output amount of the effect.

As a gaming machine of means 4 related to the feature unit 71AK,
It is equipped with an initialization detection means (for example, clear switch AK001) that can detect an operation related to the initialization of the gaming machine, unlike the operation during the game by the player.
In the change permission state, the set value by the setting means can be changed according to the detection of the operation by the initialization detection means (for example, when the clear switch AK001 is used instead of the setting changeover switch 52). ),
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 3 according to the feature unit 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an obstacle in the work of changing the set value without separately providing a configuration for changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of means 5 related to the feature unit 71AK,
A change notification means (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) for notifying a change of a set value by the setting means is provided.
The change notification means performs notification (for example, output of the setting change notification voice 71AKE01) by a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection means.
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 4 according to the feature unit 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed due to fraudulent activity and to prevent the setting value from being changed.

As a gaming machine of means 6 related to the feature unit 71AK,
A setting confirmation control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation process of step AKS002) that can control the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting means is provided.
The output amount control means
In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to control the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection means (for example, the power saving function setting screen higher than the setting confirmation notification priority 71AKP13). Priority 71AKP12, etc.),
In the change permission state, the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection means is not controlled (for example, the priority of the setting change notification higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen such as the power saving function). 71AKP11 etc.),
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 5 according to the feature unit 71AK.
In such a configuration, the stage of the output amount of the effect can be controlled together with the confirmation of the set value, but the stage of the output amount of the effect is not controlled when the set value is changed. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring.
The correspondence between the means 2 to the means 6 related to the feature portion 71AK and the means 1 can be applied to the correspondence between the means 2 to the means 6 related to the feature portion 71AK and the means F.

(Explanation of feature 72AK)
FIG. 21-41 shows an execution example of the power-on operation by the movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 includes a first movable member serving as a first movable effect device and a second movable member serving as a second movable effect device. The first movable member stops at the lower left position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retracted position). An operation effect of ascending diagonally upward to the right from the evacuation position, stopping at an advance position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and then returning to the evacuation position is performed. The first movable member includes a rotation mechanism, first to third split pieces, and a slide mechanism. The first to third split pieces are provided at the tip of the rotating mechanism. The first to third split pieces form a predetermined figure at the origin position when they are united in the closed state. The rotation mechanism of the first movable member is rotated by the operation motor AK011 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5. As a result, after the first movable member advances to the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5, the first to third split pieces are split by the operation motor AK012. On the other hand, when the first movable member is in the origin position, the first to third split pieces cannot be opened. The slide mechanism of the first movable member is slid laterally by the operation motor AK013 after the rotation mechanism of the first movable member and the first to third split pieces are rotated to the advanced positions. The slide mechanism of the first movable member has the rotation mechanism and the first to third split pieces on the left side of the effect display device 5 with the origin position when the first movable member is in the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5. It suffices if it can be slid between the position and the right side position.

The second movable member stops with the position above the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retracted position). After descending from the retracted position and stopping at an advance position overlapping on the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, an operation effect of returning to the retracted position is performed. The second movable member is lowered by the operation motor AK014 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position slightly above the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and is raised from the advanced position to the retracted position. In this way, the second movable member performs an effect operation of simply reciprocating up and down by the driving force of the operation motor AK014.

The origin position of the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK021. The origin position of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK022. The origin position of the slide mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK023. The origin position of the second movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK024. The operation motor AK011 provides a driving force that makes the rotation mechanism of the first movable member movable between the origin position and the advance position. The operating motor AK012 provides a driving force that makes the first to third split pieces of the first movable member movable between the closed state and the open state at the origin position. The operation motor AK013 provides a driving force that makes the slide mechanism of the first movable member movable between the origin position and the left side position or the right side position of the effect display device 5. The operating motor AK014 provides a driving force that makes the second movable member movable between the origin position and the advance position.

The power-on operation by the first movable member and the second movable member includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial motion is an initial motion that performs the same motion as the normal effect motion during the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game. By executing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a problem occurs in the normal production operation. The short initial operation is an operation in which some operations in the normal effect operation are omitted, and is a return operation for returning the first movable member and the second movable member to the origin position.

When the long initial operation is executed as the power-on operation, first, as shown by the solid line arrow 72KM01, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is moved to the origin position (retract position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. It is moved to an overlapping position on the front side of the center of the display screen in the effect display device 5 which is the advance position. Subsequently, as shown by the broken line arrow 72AKM02, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the closed state to the open state at the origin position by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. After that, as shown by the broken line arrow 72AKM03, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the open state to the closed state (origin position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Next, as shown by the solid line arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06, the slide mechanism of the first movable member is moved from the origin position to the movable position in the right direction by the driving force of the operation motor AK013, and then moved to the movable position in the left direction. After that, return to the origin position. Then, as shown by the solid line arrow 72AKM07, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is returned from the advance position to the origin position (retract position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. After that, as shown by the broken arrow arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09, the second movable member is moved from the origin position (retract position) to the advance position by the driving force of the operation motor AK014, and then returned to the origin position (retract position).

When the short initial operation is executed as the power-on operation, a part of the long initial operation may be omitted. For example, among the operations indicated by the arrows 72AKM01 to 72AKM09, the control for executing the operations indicated by the dashed arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, and 72AKM09 is performed. In this case, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member cannot be moved from the closed state to the open state unless the rotation mechanism of the first movable member moves to the advanced position. Therefore, even in the short initial operation, the operation indicated by the solid line arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07 is required. Further, in the long initial operation, the operation of the first to third split pieces and the second movable member of the first movable member is performed so that the movement amount is larger than the operation indicated by the broken line arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, 72AKM09. It may be done. In the short initial operation, the slide mechanism of the first movable member may be moved so that the amount of movement is smaller than the operation indicated by the solid line arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06.

In the short initial operation, at least a part of the operation may be omitted or added depending on the detection result by the origin sensors AK021 to AK024. For example, when the origin sensor AK022 is off and the other origin sensors are on, the broken line arrow 72AKM03 is used as an operation to move the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to the closed state which is the origin position. The operation motor AK012 is driven so as to move in the direction. Then, when the origin sensor AK022 is turned on, the drive of the operation motor AK012 may be stopped. After that, by moving the rotation mechanism of the first movable member so as to be smaller than the movement amount indicated by the solid line arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07, the origin sensor AK021 is once turned off and then turned on. Drive the motor AK021. Further, the second movable member may be moved as indicated by the broken line arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09 to drive the operation motor AK024 so that the origin sensor AK024 is once turned off and then turned on.

FIG. 21-42 shows a control pattern used to drive a movable member by the operating motors AK011 to AK014. The pattern data constituting these control patterns may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. In this embodiment, a short initial control pattern 72AKP01, a long initial control pattern 72AKP02, an effect operation A control pattern 72AKP11, and an effect operation B control pattern 72AKP12 are prepared in advance as control patterns for the movable member.

The short initial control pattern 72AKP01 is a control pattern used to execute the short initial operation. The long initial control pattern AKP02 is a control pattern used to execute the long initial operation. The effect A control pattern 72AKP11 is a control pattern used to execute an operation of a movable member included in a first effect executed with the progress of a game, such as a reach effect. The effect B control pattern 72AKP12 is a control pattern used to execute an operation of a movable member included in a second effect different from the first effect executed as the game progresses, such as a notice effect. .. As the control pattern of the movable member, more control patterns may be prepared, or some control patterns may be prepared. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the drive contents of the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the pattern data read from the ROM 121, and control the operation of the movable member.

FIG. 21-43 is a flowchart showing an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the feature portion 72AK of this embodiment. It suffices that this power-on command process can be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 72AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main board 11 in the same manner as in the above embodiment (steps 72AKS001 to 72AKS004). When the reception command is determined to be the setting change start command in step 72AKS003 (step 72AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 72AKS005) and the setting is changed in the same manner as in the above embodiment. Control to start the notification (step 72AKS006).

After the control in step 72AKS006 is performed, unlike the above embodiment, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS007). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the short initial control pattern 72AKP01 from the predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS007, it is possible to perform the control to execute the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting is changed as the change permission state. Even in the period after proceeding to step 72AKS008 or later, the control in step 72AKS007 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

Following the control by step 72AKS007, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change in the same manner as in the above embodiment (step 72AKS008). If the setting change is not completed (step 72AKS008; No), step 72AKS008 is repeatedly executed and waits. When it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed (step 72AKS008; Yes), the setting change notification is controlled to end (step 72AKS009), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS010).

After executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS010, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS011), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014. In step 72AKS011, for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the long initial control pattern 72AKP02 from the predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS011, it is possible to perform the control to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation of the movable member after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS011, the long initial operation which is the initial operation is executed after the short initial operation which is the return operation when the setting is changed as the change permission state. It is possible to prevent control. Even after proceeding to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS011 may be continuously executed until the end of the long initial operation period, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

When the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 (step 72AKS001; Yes), control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS012), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 72AKS013). In step 72AKS013, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation controlled by the control in step 72AKS012 is completed. By executing the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial which is the initial operation. It is possible to control the execution of the operation. Even after proceeding to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS013 may be continuously executed until the end of the long initial operation period, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

After that, control is performed to execute the initialization notification (step 72AKS014). It should be noted that the control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. When the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control to execute the initialization notification may be performed before the control to execute the short initial operation is performed by step 72AKS012. ..

If the reception command is determined to be the setting confirmation start command in step 72AKS004 (step 72AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 72AKS015) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting confirmation is performed. Control to start the notification (step 72AKS016). Subsequently, unlike the above embodiment, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS017). By executing the control in step 72AKS017, the control for executing the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It can be performed. Even in the period after proceeding to step 72AKS018 or later, the control in step 72AKS017 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

Following the control by step 72AKS017, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation as in the above embodiment (step 72AKS018). If the setting confirmation is not completed (step 72AKS018; No), step 72AKS018 is repeatedly executed and waits. If it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is completed (step 72AKS018; Yes), the setting confirmation notification is controlled to end (step 72AKS019), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS020).

After the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS021), and the power-on command processing is ended. By executing the control in step 72AKS021, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed, the long initial operation which is the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS021, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value is in the setting confirmation state, the long initial operation which is the initial operation is followed by the short initial operation which is the return operation. Can be prevented from controlling to execute. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period is completed, and the long initial operation may be executed.

If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the reception command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS022), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 72AKS023), the command processing at power-on is terminated. In step 72AKS023, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation controlled by the control in step 72AKS022 is completed. By executing the control in steps 72AKS022 and 72AKS023, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial which is the initial operation. It is possible to control the execution of the operation. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS023 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and the long initial operation may be executed. The control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

(Explanation of a modified example of the feature portion 72AK)
FIG. 21-44 is a flowchart showing an example of a power-on command process executed in a modified example of the feature portion 72AK. In the power-on command processing in this modification, the case where the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 (step 72AKS001; Yes) and the processing at the end of the game stop state are executed in step 72AKS010. Later, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS031), then control is performed to execute the long initial operation (step 72AKS032), and then the process proceeds to step 72AKS014 to control execution of the initialization notification. If the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the stored contents in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 are initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply by turning on the power. Correspondingly, the initialization notification is executed by executing the control in step 72AKS014. When this initialization notification is executed, by executing the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032, it is possible to perform control to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation after the short initial operation which is the return operation. .. Further, even after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, and then the return operation is performed. Following the initial operation, it is possible to control the execution of the long initial operation which is the initial operation. In this way, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 and after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in common steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 , It is possible to control the execution of the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

In the power-on command processing in this modified example, when the reception command is determined to be the power failure recovery designation command in step 72AKS002 (step 72AKS002; Yes), and the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020. Later, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 72AKS033), and then control is performed to execute the long initial operation (step 72AKS034), and then the power-on command processing is terminated. When the reception command is determined to be the power failure recovery designation command in step 72AKS002, the stored contents in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 are restored to the stored contents at the time of the power failure when the power supply is started by turning on the power. .. When such a power failure recovery is executed, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed to control the execution of the long initial operation which is the initial operation after the short initial operation which is the return operation. it can. Further, even after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed, so that the setting confirmation for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. After the state ends, it is possible to control the execution of the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, following the short initial operation, which is the return operation. In this way, when the reception command is determined to be the power failure recovery notification command in step 72AKS002 and after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020, the control in common steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 , It is possible to control the execution of the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled to be executed when the initialization notification is performed, or may be controlled to be executed even if the initialization notification is not performed. Further, the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled to be executed when the power failure recovery notification is performed, or may be controlled to be executed even if the power failure recovery notification is not performed. Further, after the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the return operation condition. After the control to execute the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control to execute the long initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the initial operation condition.

The configuration of the movable member is not limited to the form including the first movable member and the second movable member, and at least a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation can be executed. It suffices as long as it can be operated according to a predetermined operation mode in the production accompanying the progress of the game. The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be arbitrarily specified according to the configuration of the movable member.

As described above, in the power-on command process of the feature unit 72AK, in step 72AKS007, control is performed to execute the short initial operation. In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the change of the set value with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member are placed at the origin position. Control is performed to execute the return operation. As a result, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the movable member is returned to the origin position, so that the work of changing the set value is not hindered by the movable member, and the work of changing the set value is performed. It is possible to prevent the trouble from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 72AK, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 is performed, so that the short initial operation is a return operation. Then, control is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation. On the other hand, when the short initial operation is executed by the control in step 72AKS007, the control to execute the long initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is executed in the setting change state, the execution of the setting change notification may be hindered and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, the control to execute the long initial operation is performed after the setting change state is completed, and the control to execute the long initial operation is not performed when the setting confirmation state is reached. In this way, when the setting is changed as the change permission state, the long initial operation, which is the initial operation by the movable member, is not executed so that the setting value change work is not hindered. It is possible to prevent the value change work from being hindered. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

When it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed, control is performed in step 72AKS011 to execute the long initial operation. In this way, control is performed to execute only the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member in the case of preventing the operation of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

In the power-on command processing in the modified example of the feature unit 72AK, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to perform the return operation. Control is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation. At this time, the control in step 72AKS014 is performed to control the execution of the initialization notification. In this way, the stored contents in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, and when the initialization related to the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, the initialization notification is sent. When the initialization notification is executed and the initialization notification is executed, the control is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Further, even when it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Take control. As a result, when it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered, it is possible to standardize the operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 72AK, in step AKS017, control is performed to execute the short initial operation. In this way, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member are placed at the origin position. Control is performed to execute the return operation. After that, when it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is completed, control is performed in step 72AKS021 to execute the long initial operation. In this way, control is performed to execute the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, after the setting confirmation state is completed. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is executed in the setting confirmation state, the execution of the setting confirmation notification may be hindered and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, the control to execute the long initial operation is performed after the setting confirmation state is completed, and the control to execute the long initial operation is not performed when the setting confirmation state is reached. As a result, in order to prevent the setting value change work from being hindered, the set value can be easily confirmed by preventing the long initial operation, which is the initial operation by the movable member, from being executed in the setting confirmation state. To do so. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

(Explanation of means related to feature 72AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature portion 72AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for returning the movable member to the origin position, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22154. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2016-22154, the case where the setting change and the operation of the movable member conflict with each other has not been taken into consideration. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 72AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply, and
Movable members that can move according to the progress of the game (for example, the first movable member operated by the operating motors AK011 to AK013, the second movable member operated by the operating motor AK014, etc.)
At least, a movable control means (for example, a step) capable of controlling a return operation (for example, a short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the origin position and a control for an initial operation (for example, a long initial operation) by the movable member. It is equipped with an effect control CPU 120 that executes command processing when the power of AKS012 is turned on.
The movable control means controls to execute the return operation when the change permission state is set (for example, execution of step 72AKS007).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is executed when the change permission state is set, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

Further, as a gaming machine of means F according to the feature portion 72AK that solves the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2016-22154.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply, and
Movable members that can move according to the progress of the game (for example, the first movable member operated by the operating motors AK011 to AK013, the second movable member operated by the operating motor AK014, etc.)
At least, a movable control means (for example, a step) capable of controlling a return operation (for example, a short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the origin position and a control for an initial operation (for example, a long initial operation) by the movable member. It is equipped with an effect control CPU 120 that executes command processing when the power of AKS012 is turned on.
The movable control means controls to execute the return operation when the change permission state is set (for example, execution of step 72AKS007).
further,
It is possible to execute control corresponding to an advantageous period advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state, a low accuracy high base state, a high accuracy high base state including a special zone, a small hit game state).
A game value-giving means for giving a game value (for example, a prize ball) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a prize ball process) and
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control process process) and
With the game value totaling means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of 113SGS308 or 113SGS319 of the prize ball number display processing shown in FIG. 8-17) that can total the game value given by the game value adding means. ,
With the total value display means capable of displaying the total value totaled by the game value totaling means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of 113SGS309 or 113SGS320 of the prize ball number display processing shown in FIG. 8-17). ,
With
The advantageous period is a specific period (for example, a jackpot gaming state) and a period connected to the specific period, and the degree of advantage for the player is different from the specific period, and a specific notification effect advantageous for the player is executed. A predetermined period (for example, a high-accuracy high-based state including a special zone) and a special period (for example, a low-accuracy high-based state) in which the specific period and the predetermined period have different advantages for the player are included.
The game value totaling means is the first total value which is the total value of the game value given by the game value giving means in the advantageous period (for example, the value of all the prize balls paid out during the consecutive villa). The second aggregated value (for example, paid during the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot A), which is the aggregated value of the game value given by the game value-giving means during the specific period and the predetermined period. It is possible to add up the number of prize balls issued and the number of prize balls paid out during the special zone).
The aggregated value display means can display the first aggregated value and the second aggregated value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-23, of all the prize balls paid out during the consecutive villas. The value of the first prize ball counter, which is the total value, 113SG005A, and the number of prize balls paid out during the big hit game of the probability variation big hit A, and the second prize ball, which is the total value of the number of prize balls paid out during the special zone. A gaming machine characterized in that the value 113SG005B of a number counter can be displayed on the image display device 5).
According to this feature, since the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position is executed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered. In addition, the aggregated value in the advantageous period can be appropriately displayed.

As a gaming machine of means 2 related to the feature portion 72AK,
The movable control means
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013).
In the change permission state, the control for executing the initial operation following the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS008).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the change permission state and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 3 related to the feature portion 72AK,
The movable control means controls to execute only the initial operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 72AKS011).
It may be a gaming machine of means 2 according to the feature unit 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent unnecessary operation by the movable member and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 4 related to the feature portion 72AK,
When the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the initialization notification means (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, step 72AKS014) that executes initialization notification. Etc.)
The movable control means
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 accompanying the execution of step 72AKS014).
After the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 following steps 72AKS005 to 72AKS010).
It may be a gaming machine of means 2 according to the feature unit 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the operation by the movable member to reduce the control load and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 5 according to the feature portion 72AK,
A setting confirmation control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation process of step AKS002) that can control the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting means is provided.
The movable control means
In the setting confirmation state, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS017).
After the setting confirmation state is completed, control for executing the initial operation is performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS021).
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 4 according to the feature unit 72AK.
In such a configuration, the set value can be easily confirmed by preventing the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the setting confirmation state, and it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.
The correspondence between the means 2 to the means 5 and the means 1 according to the feature portion 72AK can be applied to the correspondence between the means 2 to the means 5 and the means F according to the feature portion 72AK.

(Explanation of feature 73AK)
FIG. 21-45 is a flowchart showing an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the feature unit 73AK of this embodiment. It suffices that this power-on command process can be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the feature unit 73AK as well, the operation content of the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be the same as that of the feature unit 72AK of this embodiment. In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main board 11 in the same manner as in the above embodiment (steps 73AKS001 to 73AKS004). If the reception command is determined to be the setting change start command in step 73AKS003 (step 73AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 73AKS005) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting is changed. Control to start the notification (step 73AKS006).

After performing the control in step 73AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 73AKS007). If the setting change is not completed (step 73AKS007; No), step 73AKS007 is repeatedly executed and waits. When it is determined in step 73AKS007 to end the setting change (step 73AKS007; Yes), the setting change notification is controlled to end (step 73AKS008), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS009). As described above, in the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, when the setting is changed as the change permission state, the control for executing the short initial operation as the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not performed. ..

When the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 73AKS001 (step 73AKS001; Yes), or after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 73AKS009, the control to execute the short initial operation is controlled. (Step 73AKS010), and then control to execute the long initial operation (step 73AKS011). In step 73AKS011, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation controlled by the control in step 73AKS010 is completed. By performing the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial operation which is the initial operation. Can be controlled to execute. Further, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, it is possible to control to execute the short initial operation which is the return operation after the setting change state is completed. Alternatively, when the setting change state is controlled as the change permission state with the start of power supply, after the setting change state is completed, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial which is the initial operation. It is possible to control the execution of the operation.

After that, control is performed to execute the initialization notification (step 73AKS012). It should be noted that the control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the short initial operation or the long initial operation may be performed. Alternatively, control for executing the short initial operation may be performed, then control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

When the reception command is determined to be the setting confirmation start command in step 73AKS004 (step 73AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 73AKS013) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting confirmation is performed. Control to start the notification (step 73AKS014). Subsequently, control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 73AKS015). By executing the control in step 73AKS015, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the control for executing the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is executed. It can be performed. Even in the period after proceeding to step 73AKS016 or later, the control in step 73AKS015 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control to execute the short initial operation may be performed.

Following the control by step 73AKS015, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation (step 73AKS016). If the setting confirmation is not completed (step 73AKS016; No), step 73AKS016 is repeatedly executed and waits. If it is determined in step 73AKS016 that the setting confirmation is completed (step 73AKS016; Yes), the setting confirmation notification is controlled to end (step 73AKS017), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS018). Next, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 73AKS019), and the command processing at power-on ends. By executing the control in step 73AKS019, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed, the long initial operation which is the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS019, the long initial operation which is the initial operation is followed by the short initial operation which is the return operation when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value is in effect. Can be prevented from controlling to execute. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS019 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and the long initial operation may be executed.

When it is determined in step 73AKS002 that the reception command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 73AKS002; Yes), control is performed to execute the short initial operation (step 73AKS020), and then control to execute the long initial operation. (Step 73AKS021), the command processing at power-on is terminated. In step 73AKS021, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation controlled by the control in step 73AKS020 is completed. By executing the control in steps 73AKS020 and 73AKS021, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, the short initial operation which is the return operation is followed by the long initial which is the initial operation. You can control the execution of operations. Even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period is completed, and the long initial operation may be executed. The control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by a common process using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02 as in the case of the feature unit 72AK. Alternatively, the control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02 as in the case of the feature unit 72AK.

FIG. 21-46 shows a setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 displayed during execution of the setting confirmation notification for the feature unit 73AK. On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, a character image for notifying the message "setting confirmation in progress" is displayed, and the history of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. The history of the set value may be cumulatively stored on the side of the effect control board 12 by storing the set value information together with the RTC information in the backup area of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12, for example. Alternatively, the history of the set value can be obtained by storing the set value information together with the RTC information in a predetermined area in a non-volatile storage device (for example, a flash memory) provided separately from the RAM 122. It may be stored cumulatively on the side. Alternatively, when the set value history is stored in the backup area together with the RTC information in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the setting confirmation start command is transmitted. By transmitting a set value history command prepared in advance as an effect control command capable of specifying the history of the set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, power is supplied on the effect control board 12 side. It may be possible to identify it with the start of.

When the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 is displayed, if the movable member is stopped at a position deviated from the origin position, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display screen of the effect display device 5, and the history of the set value can be grasped. It becomes difficult to do. Therefore, in the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, the control in step 73AKS015 is executed, so that the pachinko game machine 1 can be moved when it is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value. Control is performed to execute a short initial operation, which is a return operation for returning the member to the origin position. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply, unlike the case where the setting change state is controlled, the short initial operation which is the return operation is executed, so that the setting confirmation notification screen is executed. The history of the set values that can be displayed on the 73AKD01 can be easily grasped by the staff of the amusement park or the like. On the other hand, in the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS018, so that the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When is, the control to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation is not performed after the short initial operation which is the return operation. In this way, when the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the power supply is started, the short initial operation which is the return operation is executed while the long initial operation which is the initial operation is executed in this setting confirmation state. Since the operation is not executed, the long initial operation is executed after the game hall staff can easily grasp the history of the set values that can be displayed on the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the movable member from making it difficult to grasp the history of the set value.

Even when the setting is controlled to the changed state, the history of the set value may be displayable. In this case, control may be performed to execute a short initial operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting is changed as the change permission state. In this way, when the history of the set value can be displayed by being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the power supply starts, the short initial operation that is the return operation is executed so that the set value The history of the power may be easily grasped.

As described above, in the power-on command processing of the feature unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, control is performed in step 73AKS010 to execute the short initial operation. .. On the other hand, when the reception command is determined to be the setting change start command in step 73AKS003, the control to execute the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 73AKS007 to end the setting change. As a result, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the short initial operation which is the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed, so that the change work of the set value is not hindered by the return operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

In the power-on command process of the feature unit 73AK, after it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is completed, the control in step 73AKS010 is performed to control the execution of the short initial operation as the return operation. In this way, since the control is performed to execute the short initial operation that is the return operation after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, it is movable when it is prevented that the setting value change work is hindered. The operation of properly returning the member to the origin position becomes possible.

In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 73AKS001, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, so that the short initial operation is a return operation. Then, control is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation. At this time, the control in step 73AKS012 is performed to control the execution of the initialization notification. In this way, the stored contents in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, and when the initialization related to the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, the initialization notification is sent. When the initialization notification is executed and the initialization notification is executed, the control is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Further, even when it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is completed, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed to execute the long initial operation which is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Take control. As a result, when it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered, it is possible to standardize the operation of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, the history of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AK004 that the reception command is the setting confirmation start command, the short initial operation is controlled in step 73AKS015. In this way, when the display of the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, which is a setting confirmation display capable of displaying the history of the set value, is being executed, control is performed to execute the short initial operation which is the return operation. As a result, the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped when it is prevented that the operation of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In the power-on command process of the feature unit 73AK, when the command 9100H, which is the setting change start command, is received in step 73AKS003, it is determined that the received command is the setting change start command. The command 9100H, which is a setting change start command transmitted from the main board 11, is different from the command 9000H, which is a RAM clear notification command, the command 9200H, which is a power failure recovery designation command, and the command 9400H, which is a setting confirmation start command. In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the change of the set value with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, a command as information different from the case where the setting change state is not controlled is transmitted. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control burden related to the effect when it is prevented that the work of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, the set value can be changed appropriately.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 73AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature unit 73AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for returning the movable member to the origin position, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22154. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2016-22154, the case where the setting change and the operation of the movable member conflict with each other has not been taken into consideration. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 73AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply, and
Movable members that can move according to the progress of the game (for example, the first movable member operated by the operating motors AK011 to AK013, the second movable member operated by the operating motor AK014, etc.)
At least, it is provided with a movable control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes a command process at power-on in step AKS012) capable of executing control of a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position.
The movable control means
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
When the change permission state is set, the control for executing the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed in the change permission state, so that it is possible to prevent an obstacle in the work of changing the set value.

Further, as a gaming machine of means F according to the feature unit 73AK that solves the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2016-22154.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply, and
Movable members that can move according to the progress of the game (for example, the first movable member operated by the operating motors AK011 to AK013, the second movable member operated by the operating motor AK014, etc.)
At least, it is provided with a movable control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes a command process at power-on in step AKS012) capable of executing control of a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position.
The movable control means
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
In the change permission state, the control for executing the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
further,
It is possible to execute control corresponding to an advantageous period advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state, a low accuracy high base state, a high accuracy high base state including a special zone, a small hit game state).
A game value-giving means for giving a game value (for example, a prize ball) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a prize ball process) and
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control process process) and
With the game value totaling means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of 113SGS308 or 113SGS319 of the prize ball number display processing shown in FIG. 8-17) that can total the game value given by the game value adding means. ,
With the total value display means capable of displaying the total value totaled by the game value totaling means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of 113SGS309 or 113SGS320 of the prize ball number display processing shown in FIG. 8-17). ,
With
The advantageous period is a specific period (for example, a jackpot gaming state) and a period connected to the specific period, and the degree of advantage for the player is different from the specific period, and a specific notification effect advantageous for the player is executed. A predetermined period (for example, a high-accuracy high-based state including a special zone) and a special period (for example, a low-accuracy high-based state) in which the specific period and the predetermined period have different advantages for the player are included.
The game value totaling means is the first total value which is the total value of the game value given by the game value giving means in the advantageous period (for example, the value of all the prize balls paid out during the consecutive villa). The second aggregated value (for example, paid during the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot A), which is the aggregated value of the game value given by the game value-giving means during the specific period and the predetermined period. It is possible to add up the number of prize balls issued and the number of prize balls paid out during the special zone).
The aggregated value display means can display the first aggregated value and the second aggregated value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-23, of all the prize balls paid out during the consecutive villas. The value of the first prize ball counter, which is the total value, 113SG005A, and the number of prize balls paid out during the big hit game of the probability variation big hit A, and the second prize ball, which is the total value of the number of prize balls paid out during the special zone. A gaming machine characterized in that the value 113SG005B of a number counter can be displayed on the image display device 5).
According to this feature, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not executed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered. In addition, the aggregated value in the advantageous period can be appropriately displayed.

In addition, a plurality of types of display modes of the first total value and the second total value are provided, and one of the display modes is selected from the plurality of types of display modes using a selection table or the like in which the selection ratio of each display mode differs depending on the set value. Then, by displaying the first total value and the second total value in the selected display mode, the player may be able to estimate the set value based on the appearance ratio of each display mode. By doing so, the display modes of the first aggregated value and the second aggregated value are rich in variety, and moreover, the player can be given an opportunity to estimate the set value according to the appearance ratio of each display mode. Can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, the first aggregated value and the second aggregated value that are aggregated by the game value aggregation means and displayed by the aggregated value display means are set change processing when the set value is changed by the setting means. Since the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in, the display of the image display devices 5 and 107SG005 becomes the display of the initial screen, and the aggregated value display means is hidden, but the set value is changed by the setting means. Even in this case, the stored contents of the RAM 102 may not be initialized (cleared), and the state before the set value is changed may be retained. By doing so, if the first aggregated value or the second aggregated value is displayed by the aggregated value display means before the set value is changed, the first aggregated value or the first aggregated value is displayed even after the set value is changed. It is possible to display the second aggregated value.

As a gaming machine of means 2 related to the feature unit 73AK,
The movable control means controls to execute the return operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 73AK.
In such a configuration, the movable member can be operated appropriately, and it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 3 according to the feature unit 73AK,
When the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the initialization notification means (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, step 73AKS012) that executes initialization notification. Etc.)
The movable control means
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation by the movable member following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS010 to 73AKS012).
After the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010 following steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 or means 2 according to the feature unit 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the operation by the movable member to reduce the control load and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 4 according to the feature unit 73AK,
A setting display means (for example, an effect display device 5) capable of executing a setting confirmation display for confirming a setting value set by the setting means is provided.
The setting display means can display a history of set values set by the setting means in the setting confirmation display (for example, display of the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01).
The movable control means controls to execute the return operation when the setting confirmation display is executed, and does not control to execute the initial operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS015 and 73AKS016).
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 3 according to the feature unit 73AK.
In such a configuration, the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped by preventing the initial operation by the movable member from being executed when the setting confirmation display is being executed, and the work of changing the setting value is hindered. Can be prevented.

As a gaming machine of means 5 according to the feature unit 73AK,
The effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the command analysis process of AKS015) for controlling the execution of the effect based on the information from the game control means is provided.
When the game control means is controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, the game control means transmits information different from the case where the change permission state is not controlled (for example, command 9100H which is a setting change start command). ,
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 4 according to the feature unit 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by the effect control means and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.
The correspondence between the means 2 to the means 5 and the means 1 according to the feature portion 73AK can be applied to the correspondence between the means 2 to the means 5 and the means F according to the feature portion 73AK.

(Explanation of feature 74AK)
FIG. 21-47 shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect with respect to the feature portion 74AK of this embodiment. The pattern data constituting the effect control pattern 74AKP01 may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. The confirmation effect is executably controlled based on the establishment of predetermined confirmation effect conditions after the power supply is started by turning on the power. The confirmation effect of the feature portion 74AK is the output of the confirmation sound that outputs the trumpet sound twice from the left speaker 8L, the output of the confirmation sound that outputs the drum sound twice from the right speaker 8R, and the stick controller 31A. It includes confirmation vibration that drives two sets of vibration motors built into the operating rod (lever) in a predetermined pattern. The effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes data indicating the initial value 74AKJ00 of the confirmation effect process timer, and for example, the initial value of the confirmation effect process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 can be set. Further, in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ02 are confirmed. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 associated with the effect process timer determination value 74AKJ03 is included. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound that outputs the trumpet sound twice from the left speaker 8L. The second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound that outputs the drum sound twice from the right speaker 8R. The third confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 is used to control the confirmation vibration that drives two sets of vibration motors built in the operation stick (lever) of the stick controller 31A in a predetermined pattern. When controlling the execution of the confirmation effect, the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer is updated, and when any of the confirmation effect process timer determination values 74AKJ01 to 74AKJ03 is matched, the first to third confirmations corresponding to the matched determination values are made. By performing control using the effect control data 74AKD03, it is possible to output a confirmation sound and execute confirmation vibration.

Further, during the execution of the confirmation effect, some or all of the light emitting members included in the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on. For example, when the confirmation effect is started, the lighting of the light emitting member is started, and the output of the confirmation sound is started from the left speaker 8L. When the output of the confirmation sound by the left speaker 8L is completed, the output of the confirmation sound is started from the right speaker 8R. When the output of the confirmation sound by the right speaker 8R is completed, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A is started. Then, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A ends, the light emitting member is turned off, and the confirmation effect ends. In the confirmation effect, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected within the predetermined confirmation acceptance period after the power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. And the execution is started. One of the effects of the confirmation sound output by the left speaker 8L, the confirmation sound output by the right speaker 8R, and the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A. When the control to execute is performed, the control to execute other effects is not performed. As described above, when any one of the confirmation sound output and the confirmation vibration included in the confirmation effect is executed, the control may be performed so as not to execute the other effect. In this way, by executing the output of the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration at different timings, the staff of the amusement park or the like can easily grasp whether or not the production using each production device can be normally executed. Can be done.

FIG. 21-48 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the feature unit 74AK. It suffices that this effect control main process can be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the feature unit 74AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization process (step 74AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 74AKS012) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and then turns on the timer interrupt flag. If it is determined (step 74AKS013) and if it is off (step 74AKS013; No), step 74AKS013 is repeatedly executed and waits. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step 74AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 74AKS014), the command analysis process (step 74AKS015), and the effect control process process. (Step 74AKS016) and the effect random number update process (step 74AKS017) are executed in order. Further, in the effect control main process of the feature unit 74AK, the confirmation effect control process (step 74AKS018) is executed, and then the process returns to step 74AKS013.

FIG. 21-49 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 74AKS018 as the confirmation effect control process. In the confirmation effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization notification has been started (step 74AKS031). For example, in the power-on command process of the above embodiment, the initialization notification is started by performing the control in step AKS030. After that, when the determination in step 74AKS031 is performed for the first time, it may be determined that the initialization notification is started. An initialization notification start flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and when the initialization notification start flag is on, it may be determined that the initialization notification has started.

If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification has started (step 74AKS031; Yes), control is performed to start the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS032). The confirmation reception period starts with the start of the initialization notification, and may end with the lapse of a predetermined confirmation reception time such as 30 seconds or 1 minute.

If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification has not started (step 74AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not it is the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS033). When the confirmation acceptance period is started in step 74AKS032, or when it is determined in step 74AKS033 that the confirmation acceptance period is (step 74AKS033; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display is started (step). 74AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the variable display has been started by receiving the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command transmitted from the main board 11.

If it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display has started (step 74AKS034; Yes), the confirmation acceptance period is controlled to be canceled (step 74AKS035), and the confirmation effect control process is terminated. In this way, if the variable display is started during the confirmation acceptance period, the confirmation acceptance period is canceled and the confirmation effect condition is restricted so as not to be satisfied. By canceling the confirmation acceptance period with the start of the variable display, it is possible to control so that the execution of the effect and the execution of the confirmation effect as the game progresses do not overlap, and the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

If it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display is not started (step 74AKS034; No), it is determined whether or not there is an operation detection for starting the confirmation effect (step 74AKS036). In step 74AKS036, when the action of pressing the push button 31B is detected, it may be determined that the action for starting the confirmation effect has been detected. At this time, if there is no motion detection (step 74AKS036; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the motion is detected (step 74AKS030; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect is read from the predetermined area of the ROM 121 (step 74AKS037), and the confirmation effect process. The timer initial value 74AKJ00 is set in the confirmation effect process timer (step 74AKS038). Further, the timer value is determined by the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 (step 74AKS039), and the process proceeds to step 74AKS046. If it is determined in step 74AKS030 that the operation has been detected and settings for executing the confirmation effect are made, control may be performed to end the confirmation acceptance period.

If it is determined in step 74AKS033 that it is not the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS033; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is in progress (step 74AKS040). In step 74AKS040, for example, when the measurement of the elapsed time by the confirmation effect process timer has started, it may be determined that the confirmation effect is in progress. At this time, if the confirmation effect is not in progress (step 74AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the confirmation effect is in progress (step 74AKS040; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display has been started (step 74AKS041). Then, when it is determined that the variable display has started (step 74AKS041; Yes), the confirmation effect is controlled to be stopped (step 74AKS042), and the confirmation effect control process is terminated. In this way, when the variable display is started during the confirmation effect, the execution of the confirmation effect is stopped so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect are controlled so as not to overlap. , The confirmation effect can be executed appropriately.

If it is determined in step 74AKS041 that the variable display has not started (step 74AKS041; No), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 74AKS043). Next, it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect process timer has timed out (step 74AKS044). At this time, if a time-out has occurred (step 74AKS044; Yes), the confirmation effect is controlled to end (step 74AKS045), and the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timeout has not occurred (step 74AKS044; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 74AKS046). If it does not match the determination value (step 74AKS046; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

When it is determined in step 74AKS046 that the determination value is matched (step 74AKS046; Yes), the effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 74AKS047). Further, after setting so that the timer value is determined by the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 74AKS048), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

FIG. 21-50 is a timing diagram showing a control example of the confirmation effect with respect to the feature portion 74AK. In FIG. 21-50 (A), when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, but the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is not detected. Correspondingly, the case where the setting change state is not controlled is shown. FIG. 21-50 (B) detects an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 and an operation of switching the lock switch 51 on when the power supply is started by turning on the power. Corresponds to the case where it is controlled to the setting change state. FIG. 21-50 (C) shows the control contents at each timing.

When the setting change state is not controlled due to the start of power supply by turning on the power at the timing 74AKT01, the effect control board 12 determines that, for example, the effect control CPU 120 has received the RAM clear notification command at the timing 74AKT02. .. In the power-on command process of the above embodiment, since the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step AKS021, the control in step AKS030 is performed and the initialization notification is started. Then, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the feature unit 74AK, it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification is started, and the confirmation acceptance period is started by the control in step 74AKS032. To. When the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 74AKT03 within this confirmation detection period, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in step 74AKS060 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect control process. The control for executing the confirmation effect, such as steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048, is started. By starting the control for executing the confirmation effect in this way, a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects can be obtained by using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. The production is executed in order. After that, when the timing 74AKT04 is reached, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed to end the confirmation effect.

On the other hand, when the setting change state is controlled due to the start of power supply by turning on the power at the timing 74AKT11, for example, the effect control CPU 120 issues a setting change start command at the timing 74AKT12 on the effect control board 12. Judge that it has been received. In the power-on command processing of the above embodiment, since the reception command is determined to be the setting change start command in step AKS023, the control of step AKS026 is performed after the game stop state start processing of step AKS025 is executed. Is performed, and the setting change notification is started. At this time, except when the setting change end command is received, the control for continuously executing the setting change notification is performed, and the control for executing the initialization notification is not started. After that, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at the timing 74AKT13, it is determined in step AKS027 of the command processing at power-on that the setting change is completed. , Step AKS030 is controlled, and initialization notification is started.

In this way, when the initialization notification by the control of step AKS030 is started at the timing 74AKT13, the initialization notification is performed in step 74AKS031 in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the feature unit 74AK. Is determined to be the start of, and the confirmation acceptance period is started by the control in step 74AKS032. Therefore, at the timing 74AKT13, the confirmation acceptance period is started with the start of the initialization notification. When the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 74AKT14 within the confirmation acceptance period, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in step 74AKS060 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect control process is performed. The control for executing the confirmation effect, such as steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048, is started. By starting the control for executing the confirmation effect in this way, a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects can be obtained by using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. The production is executed in order. After that, when the timing 74AKT15 is reached, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed to end the confirmation effect.

The effect included in the confirmation effect may be an effect using an arbitrary effect device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in addition to or instead of the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the push button 31B. May be able to execute.

As described above, in the effect control main process of the feature unit 74AK, the power-on command process is executed in step 74AKS012 as in the above embodiment, and then the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018. In the power-on command process, for example, in step AKS025 and step AKS031, the game stop state start process is executed. After the game stop state start processing is executed, the reception of commands different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and the control related to the normal effect is restricted from being executed. In this case, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. On the other hand, when the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step AKS021, the step AKS030 controls to execute the initialization notification. After that, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018, when the confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the determination that the initialization notification is started in step 74AKS031, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 or later to perform the confirmation effect. Control to execute. In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the change of the set value with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. As a result, the control for changing the set value has priority over the control for executing the confirmation effect, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

In the command processing at power-on, control in steps AKS025 to AKS030 is performed according to the setting change state. After that, by executing the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed. Do. As a result, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed when it is prevented that the work of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by the player. In the confirmation effect control process of the feature unit 74AK, the confirmation effect period is reached by executing the control in step 74AKS032, and then it is determined that the start operation has been detected in step 74AKS036, so that the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. .. As a result, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed when it is prevented that the work of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

When the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process of the feature unit 74AK, the control in step 74AKS032 is executed, so that the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) without being controlled by the setting confirmation state. ), The confirmation acceptance period will be the same as when the setting confirmation status is completed. Control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition during the confirmation acceptance period. As a result, when it is possible to prevent an obstacle in the work of changing the set value, it is possible to standardize the control regarding the execution of the confirmation effect and reduce the control burden of the confirmation effect. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

The effect control pattern 74AKP01 used in the feature unit 74AK includes the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02, thereby enabling control to output the confirmation sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, the confirmation effect includes the output of the confirmation voice by the speakers 8L and 8R which are the sound output means. As a result, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed when it is prevented that the work of changing the set value is hindered. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate setting value.

(Explanation of means relating to feature 74AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature portion 74AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine that controls to output a confirmation sound, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-201002 and JP-A-2016-220833, the case where the setting change and the effect for confirmation conflict with each other has not been taken into consideration. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 74AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply, and
Production means (for example, production display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of performing production, and
After the power supply is started, with the confirmation control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018) that can execute the control of the confirmation effect by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. With
The confirmation control means
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after executing steps AKS021 and AKS030). ),
When the change permission state is set, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed (for example, the execution of steps AKS025 to AKS029).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect is not executed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent the setting value change work from being hindered.

Further, as a gaming machine of means F according to the feature unit 74AK, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-201002 and JP-A-2016-220833.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply, and
Production means (for example, production display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of performing production, and
After the power supply is started, with the confirmation control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018) that can execute the control of the confirmation effect by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. With
The confirmation control means
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after executing steps AKS021 and AKS030). ),
When the change permission state is set, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed (for example, the execution of steps AKS025 to AKS029).
further,
It is possible to execute control corresponding to an advantageous period advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state, a low accuracy high base state, a high accuracy high base state including a special zone, a small hit game state).
A game value-giving means for giving a game value (for example, a prize ball) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a prize ball process) and
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control process process) and
With the game value totaling means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of 113SGS308 or 113SGS319 of the prize ball number display processing shown in FIG. 8-17) that can total the game value given by the game value adding means. ,
With the total value display means capable of displaying the total value totaled by the game value totaling means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of 113SGS309 or 113SGS320 of the prize ball number display processing shown in FIG. 8-17). ,
With
The advantageous period is a specific period (for example, a jackpot gaming state) and a period connected to the specific period, and the degree of advantage for the player is different from the specific period, and a specific notification effect advantageous for the player is executed. A predetermined period (for example, a high-accuracy high-based state including a special zone) and a special period (for example, a low-accuracy high-based state) in which the specific period and the predetermined period have different advantages for the player are included.
The game value totaling means is the first total value which is the total value of the game value given by the game value giving means in the advantageous period (for example, the value of all the prize balls paid out during the consecutive villa). The second aggregated value (for example, paid during the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot A), which is the aggregated value of the game value given by the game value-giving means during the specific period and the predetermined period. It is possible to add up the number of prize balls issued and the number of prize balls paid out during the special zone).
The aggregated value display means can display the first aggregated value and the second aggregated value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-23, of all the prize balls paid out during the consecutive villas. The value of the first prize ball counter, which is the total value, 113SG005A, and the number of prize balls paid out during the big hit game of the probability variation big hit A, and the second prize ball, which is the total value of the number of prize balls paid out during the special zone. A gaming machine characterized in that the value 113SG005B of a number counter can be displayed on the image display device 5).
According to this feature, since the confirmation effect is not executed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent the setting value change work from being hindered. In addition, the aggregated value in the advantageous period can be appropriately displayed.

As a gaming machine of means 2 related to the feature portion 74AK,
The confirmation control means controls to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the change permission state is completed (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after executing steps AKS025 to AKS030). ),
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 3 according to the feature portion 74AK,
Equipped with a game detection means (for example, push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting the movement by the player.
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detection means during the confirmation acceptance period (for example, execution of step 74AKS030).
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 or means 2 according to the feature unit 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 4 according to the feature portion 74AK,
When the confirmation control means is initialized without being controlled by the change permission state with the start of power supply, the confirmation effect condition in the same confirmation acceptance period as when the change permission state ends. Control to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment (for example, execution of steps 74AKS033 and 74AKS036).
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 3 according to the feature unit 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the execution of the confirmation effect and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 5 according to the feature portion 74AK,
Equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting directing sound,
The confirmation effect includes output of a confirmation voice by the sound output means (for example, execution of step 74AKS047 using the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02).
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 4 according to the feature unit 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.
The correspondence between the means 2 to the means 5 and the means 1 according to the feature portion 74AK can be applied to the correspondence between the means 2 to the means 5 and the means F according to the feature portion 74AK.

(Explanation of feature 75AK)
FIG. 21-51 is a flowchart showing an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the feature portion 75AK of this embodiment. It suffices that this power-on command process can be executed in step 74AKS012 of the effect control main process in the feature unit 74AK of the above embodiment. In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 75AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main board 11 in the same manner as in the above embodiment (steps 75AKS001 to 75AKS004). When the reception command is determined to be the setting change start command in step 75AK003 (step 75AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 75AKS005) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting is changed. Control to start the notification (step 75AKS006).

After performing the control in step 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 75AKS007). If the setting change is not completed (step 75AKS007; No), unlike the above embodiment, the setting changing confirmation effect control process is executed (step 75AKS008), and then the process returns to step 75AKS007. In this way, in the power-on command process of the feature unit 75AK, the setting change confirmation effect control process is executed in step 75AKS008, so that the setting change state is controlled as the change permission state when the power supply is started. At that time, control for executing the confirmation effect can be performed. When it is determined in step 75AKS007 to end the setting change (step 75AKS007; Yes), the setting change notification is controlled to end (step 75AKS009), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 75AKS010).

When the reception command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 75AKS001 (step 75AKS001; Yes), or after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 75AKS010, the control to execute the initialization notification is controlled. Perform (step 75AKS011), and end the command processing at power-on.

When the reception command is determined to be the setting confirmation start command in step 75AKS003 (step 75AKS003; Yes), after executing the process corresponding to the setting confirmation state (steps 75AKS012-75AKS016) as in the above embodiment. ), Ends command processing when the power is turned on. In this way, in the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 75AK, when the setting change state is controlled with the start of power supply, the setting change confirmation effect control process of step 75AKS008 is executed, while the setting confirmation state is entered. When controlled, the process corresponding to the confirmation effect control process during setting change is not executed. Therefore, while the control that enables the confirmation effect to be executed when the setting is changed is performed, the control that enables the confirmation effect to be executed when the setting is in the confirmation state is not performed.

FIG. 21-52 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 75AKS008 as the confirmation effect control process during the setting change. In the confirmation effect control process during setting confirmation, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the confirmation effect has been completed (step 75AKS031). In step 75AKS031, for example, when the confirmation effect completion flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on, it may be determined that the confirmation effect has been completed. The confirmation effect completion flag may be set to the on state when the execution of the confirmation effect is completed. If the confirmation effect has been completed in step 75AKS031 (step 75AKS031; Yes), the confirmation effect control process during setting change is terminated.

If it is determined in step 75AKS031 that the confirmation effect has not been completed (step 75AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is in progress (step 75AKS032). At this time, if the confirmation effect is not in progress (step 75AKS032; No), it is determined whether or not there is an operation detection for starting the confirmation effect (step 75AKS033). If no operation is detected in step 75AKS033 (step 75AKS033; No), the setting changing confirmation effect control process is terminated. If it is determined in step 75AKS033 that an operation has been detected (step 75AKS033; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 is read out (step 75AKS034) as a setting for starting the execution of the confirmation effect, and the confirmation effect process timer is initially set. The value 74AKJ00 is set (step 75AKS035), and the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 is set (step 75AKS036). In this way, in the confirmation effect control process during setting change, the determination in step 75AKS033 is performed. Since the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied and the execution of the confirmation effect can be started.

If it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is in progress (step 75AKS032; Yes), the confirmation effect process timer is updated and controlled (step 75AKS037), and it is determined whether or not a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038). ). At this time, if a time-out has occurred (step 75AKS038; Yes), the confirmation effect is controlled to end (step 75AKS039), and the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timeout has not occurred (step 75AKS038; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 75AKS040). If it does not match the determination value (step 75AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

When it is determined in step 75AKS040 that the determination value is matched (step 75AKS040; Yes), the effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 75AKS041). Further, after setting so that the timer value is determined by the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 75AKS042), the confirmation effect control process is terminated.

FIG. 21-53 is a timing diagram showing a control example of the confirmation effect with respect to the feature portion 75AK. In FIG. 21-53 (A), when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, but the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is not detected. Correspondingly, the case where the setting change state is not controlled is shown. FIG. 21-53 (B) shows the detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 and the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on when the power supply is started by turning on the power. Corresponds to the case where it is controlled to the setting change state. FIG. 21-53 (C) shows the control contents at each timing.

When the setting change state is not controlled due to the start of power supply by turning on the power at the timing 75AKT01, it is the same as the case where the setting change state is not controlled by the feature 74AK, and the RAM clear notification command is received at the timing 74AKT02. As a result, the initialization notification is started, and the confirmation acceptance period is started accordingly. When the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected at the timing 75AKT03 within the confirmation acceptance period, the control for executing the confirmation effect is started, and the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 and the like are started. Is used to sequentially execute a plurality of types of effects that are the first to third confirmation effects. After that, when the timing is 75AKT04, the confirmation effect ends.

On the other hand, when the power supply is controlled by turning on the power at the timing 75AKT11 and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the setting is changed at the timing 75AKT12, unlike the case where the feature portion 74AK controls the setting change state. By receiving the start command, it is determined in step 75AKS003 of the command processing at power-on that the received command is the setting change start command. As a result, following steps 75AKS005 and 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change in step 75AKS007, but if it does not end at this time, the setting changing confirmation effect control process is executed in step 75AKS008. To. In the confirmation effect control process during the setting change of the feature unit 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is not in progress, it is determined in step 75AKS033 whether or not the start operation has been detected. In this way, the confirmation effect condition can be satisfied by detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B when the setting is changed as the change permission state. For example, if the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 75AKT13 when the setting is being changed, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in step 75AKS033 of the confirmation effect control process during the setting change. , Control for executing the confirmation effect, such as steps 75AKS034 to 75AKS042 of the confirmation effect control process during setting change, is started. In this way, using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, a plurality of types of effects to be the first to third confirmation effects are sequentially executed. After that, when the timing is 75 AKT 14, the confirmation effect ends.

When the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at the timing 75AKT15 after the timing is 75AKT14, it is determined that the setting change is completed in step 75AKS007 in the power-on command processing of the feature unit 75AK. As a result, following steps 75AKS009 and 75AKS010, the control of step 75AKS011 is performed, and the initialization notification is started. When this initialization notification is started, the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, as in the case of the feature unit 74AK, so that the confirmation acceptance period is started. Just do it. Then, when the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected during this confirmation acceptance period, the control for executing the confirmation effect may be started again.

As described above, the power-on command process of the feature unit 75AK includes the setting changing confirmation effect control process executed in step 75AKS008, and the start operation is detected in step 75AKS033 of the setting changing confirmation effect control process. If it is determined that there is, the confirmation effect is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 or later, and control is performed to execute the confirmation effect. In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the change of the set value with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, the control is performed to execute the confirmation effect based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. Therefore, by making it possible to execute the confirmation effect when the setting is changed as the change permission state, the work of accurately checking the state of the gaming machine and confirming the state of the gaming machine will be hindered. Can be prevented.

In the power-on command processing of the feature unit 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the reception command is a RAM clear notification command, the same confirmation effect control processing as that of the feature unit 74AK is executed, so that confirmation is accepted. The period begins. During this confirmation acceptance period, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. On the other hand, in the confirmation effect control process during setting change, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect when it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the start operation has been detected without providing the confirmation acceptance period. As a result, the confirmation effect can be executed at any time when the setting is changed as the change permission condition. Therefore, in order to prevent the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered, the confirmation effect is performed together with the change of the set value. Can be done properly.

In the command processing at power-on of the feature unit 75AK, control in steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011 is performed in response to the setting change state. After that, the confirmation effect control process similar to that of the feature unit 74AK is executed, so that the confirmation acceptance period is started. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, the confirmation effect is executed according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period, so that the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine is hindered. In order to prevent this, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by the player. For example, in the confirmation effect control process during the setting change of the feature unit 75AK, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied by determining that the start operation has been detected in step 75AKS033. Further, by executing the confirmation effect control process similar to the feature unit 74AK, it is determined that the start operation has been detected in step 74AKS036, so that the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. As a result, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed when it is prevented that the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine is hindered.

(Explanation of means related to feature 75AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned feature portion 75AK, as a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2010-2010902. Further, as a gaming machine that controls to output a confirmation sound, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in JP-A-2010-201002 and JP-A-2016-220833, the case where the setting change and the effect for confirmation conflict with each other has not been taken into consideration. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of checking the state of the gaming machine may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 75AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent an obstacle in checking the state of the gaming machine.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply, and
Production means (for example, production display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of performing production, and
After the power supply is started, the confirmation effect control means (for example, the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018, the confirmation effect control during the setting change in step 75AKS008) that can execute the control of the confirmation effect by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. It is equipped with an effect control CPU 120 that executes processing).
The confirmation control means
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition during the confirmation acceptance period (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018, etc.). ),
In the change permission state, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process during setting change in step 75AKS008).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect can be executed when the change permission state is set, it is possible to accurately confirm the state of the gaming machine and prevent the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered. ..

Further, as a gaming machine of means F according to the feature unit 75AK for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-201002 and JP-A-2016-220833.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3) (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) and
A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process in step S25) capable of advancing the game so that the advantage for the player differs based on the set value, and
A setting control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permission state that permits the change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply, and
Production means (for example, production display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of performing production, and
After the power supply is started, the confirmation effect control means (for example, the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018, the confirmation effect control during the setting change in step 75AKS008) that can execute the control of the confirmation effect by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. It is equipped with an effect control CPU 120 that executes processing).
The confirmation control means
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition during the confirmation acceptance period (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018, etc.). ),
In the change permission state, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process during setting change in step 75AKS008).
further,
It is possible to execute control corresponding to an advantageous period advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state, a low accuracy high base state, a high accuracy high base state including a special zone, a small hit game state).
A game value-giving means for giving a game value (for example, a prize ball) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a prize ball process) and
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control process process) and
With the game value totaling means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of 113SGS308 or 113SGS319 of the prize ball number display processing shown in FIG. 8-17) that can total the game value given by the game value adding means. ,
With the total value display means capable of displaying the total value totaled by the game value totaling means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of 113SGS309 or 113SGS320 of the prize ball number display processing shown in FIG. 8-17). ,
With
The advantageous period is a specific period (for example, a jackpot gaming state) and a period connected to the specific period, and the degree of advantage for the player is different from the specific period, and a specific notification effect advantageous for the player is executed. A predetermined period (for example, a high-accuracy high-based state including a special zone) and a special period (for example, a low-accuracy high-based state) in which the specific period and the predetermined period have different advantages for the player are included.
The game value totaling means is the first total value which is the total value of the game value given by the game value giving means in the advantageous period (for example, the value of all the prize balls paid out during the consecutive villa). The second aggregated value (for example, paid during the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot A), which is the aggregated value of the game value given by the game value-giving means during the specific period and the predetermined period. It is possible to add up the number of prize balls issued and the number of prize balls paid out during the special zone).
The aggregated value display means can display the first aggregated value and the second aggregated value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-23, of all the prize balls paid out during the consecutive villas. The value of the first prize ball counter, which is the total value, 113SG005A, and the number of prize balls paid out during the big hit game of the probability variation big hit A, and the second prize ball, which is the total value of the number of prize balls paid out during the special zone. A gaming machine characterized in that the value 113SG005B of a number counter can be displayed on the image display device 5).
According to this feature, since the confirmation effect can be executed when the change permission state is set, it is possible to accurately confirm the state of the gaming machine and prevent the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered. In addition, the aggregated value in the advantageous period can be appropriately displayed.

As a gaming machine of means 2 related to the feature portion 75AK,
The confirmation control means
When initialization is performed without being controlled by the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition during the confirmation acceptance period (for example, step 74AKS033). , 74AKS036 execution, etc.),
In the change permission state, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of step 75AKS033) without providing a confirmation acceptance period.
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 according to the feature unit 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered by appropriately executing the confirmation effect together with the change of the set value.

As a gaming machine of means 3 according to the feature portion 75AK,
The confirmation control means controls to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period after the change permission state ends (for example, a step after executing steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011). Execution of 74AKS018, etc.),
It may be a gaming machine of means 1 or means 2 according to the feature portion 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means 4 according to the feature portion 75AK,
Equipped with a game detection means (for example, push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting the movement by the player.
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detection means (for example, the execution of step 75AKS033).
It may be any of the gaming machines of means 1 to means 3 according to the feature unit 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.
The correspondence between the means 2 to the means 4 and the means 1 according to the feature portion 75AK can be applied to the correspondence between the means 2 to the means 4 and the means F according to the feature portion 75AK.

(Explanation of means common to feature units 71AK to 75AK)
As a gaming machine of means A according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK,
A setting detection means (for example, a lock switch 51) that can detect an operation related to the setting, and
Initialization detection means (for example, clear switch AK001) that can detect the operation related to the initialization of the gaming machine, and
A setting confirmation control means that can control the setting confirmation state based on the detection of an operation by the setting detection means with the start of power supply (for example, CPU 103 that executes steps AKS001 and AKS002).
A change permission control means that can control the change permission state based on the detection of an operation by the initialization detection means with the start of power supply (for example, CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa13) is provided.
It may be a gaming machine according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, the setting confirmation state and the change permission state can be appropriately controlled, and the setting value can be set appropriately.

As a gaming machine of means B according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK,
A setting detection means (for example, a lock switch 51) that can detect an operation related to the setting, and
Initialization detection means (for example, clear switch AK001) that can detect operations related to initialization,
When the operation is not detected by the setting detection means and the operation is detected by the initialization detection means with the start of the power supply, the initialization notification is executed at the same time as the start of the power supply, while the power supply is started. For effect control that executes the initialization notification means (for example, the command processing at power-on in step AKS012) that executes the initialization notification after the operation is no longer detected when the operation is detected by the setting detection means. CPU120, etc.)
It may be a gaming machine according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, the initialization notification is appropriately executed, and the set value can be appropriately set.

As a gaming machine of means C according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK,
It is provided with an information display means (for example, a display monitor 29) capable of displaying information on the game value given based on the game medium entering a predetermined area.
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A).
It may be a gaming machine according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately set the set value without separately providing a configuration for displaying the set value.

As a gaming machine of means D according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK,
An effect detection means (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001) capable of detecting an operation related to the output amount of the effect, and
The display control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes step AKS026) is provided to display the display related to the set value by the setting means with priority over the display related to the output amount of the effect.
It may be a gaming machine according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, the display related to the set value is appropriately displayed, and it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of means E according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK,
The effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the command analysis process of AKS015) that controls the execution of the effect based on the information from the game control means, and the effect control means.
The effect control means is an information limiting means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes AKS027) that restricts control based on information different from the notification information for notifying the end of the change permission state when the change permission state is in effect. ) And
It may be a gaming machine according to the feature units 71AK to 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem and appropriately set the set value.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portions 71AK to 75AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions. For example, regarding the feature unit 71AK, the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the output switching process at the start in step 71AKS013 of the effect control main process, and for the feature unit 72AK, the short initial operation is performed in step 72AK007 of the command process at power-on. For effect control that does not control to execute the short initial operation until it is determined in step 73AKS007 of the command processing at power-on that the setting change is completed with respect to the configuration and feature unit 73AK of the effect control CPU 120 that controls execution. Confirmation in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process regarding the configuration of the CPU 120 and the feature unit 74AK The setting of the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 for executing the effect control process and the feature 75AK is being changed in step 75AKS008 of the command processing at power-on. The configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the confirmation effect control process may be a combination of a part or all of the effect control CPU 120 as appropriate.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Production control board 51 Lock switch 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Production control CPU
AK001 Clear switch 71AK001 Output amount changeover switch 72AKP01 Short initial control pattern 72AKP02 Long initial control pattern 74AKP01 Production control pattern

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can execute control corresponding to an advantageous period that is advantageous for the player.
The game value-giving means for giving game value and
A production execution means that can execute a production,
A game value totaling means capable of totalizing the game value given by the game value adding means, and
An aggregated value display means capable of displaying the aggregated value aggregated by the game value aggregation means, and
With
The advantageous period is a specific period, a period connected to the specific period, a predetermined period in which the degree of advantage for the player is different from the specific period, and a specific notification effect that is advantageous for the player is executed, and the specific period. And the predetermined period is a series of periods including a special period in which the advantage for the player is different.
The game value aggregation means
The first aggregated value, which is the aggregated value of the game value given by the game value-giving means in the advantageous period, can be aggregated, and is given by the game value-giving means during the specific period and the predetermined period. It is possible to aggregate the second aggregated value, which is the aggregated value of the game value.
The first aggregated value is aggregated until the end of the advantageous period.
With respect to the second aggregated value, when the specific period ends and the predetermined period starts, the aggregation is continued, while when the predetermined period ends and the special period starts, the aggregation ends.
The aggregated value display means
The first specific display corresponding to the first aggregated value and the second specific display corresponding to the second aggregated value can be displayed until each aggregation is completed.
The second specific display can be displayed during the specific period and the predetermined period, and when the predetermined period ends, the display of the second specific display ends.
further,
A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information,
With the start of power supply, the setting permission state for permitting the setting of the set value, the setting confirmation state for confirming the set setting value, and the setting control means that can be controlled by
A game control means that can be controlled to an advantageous state by a probability according to a set value, and
Movable members that can move according to the progress of the game,
At least, a movable control means capable of controlling a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position, and
It is provided with a notification means capable of notifying the setting permission state and the setting confirmation state by a common output amount.
The movable control means
When the power supply is started but the setting permission state is not controlled, the control of the return operation can be executed.
When the power supply is started and the setting permission state is controlled, the control of the return operation is not executed.
While the information including the hold information is initialized corresponding to the setting permission state, the information including the hold information is not initialized corresponding to the setting confirmation state.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images